JP6991692B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a spinning machine (generally also referred to as a "slot machine").

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as slot machines, gaming machines equipped with ART games are already known as advantageous gaming games other than bonus games in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out in advance.

However, in the ART game, since the additional lottery is performed by winning a specific role in advance, the game becomes monotonous because it is decided depending on what is won in the end.

Therefore, in recent years, a gaming machine has been proposed to reduce monotony by instructing "align 7 symbols" as a production during an ART game.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-268920

However, there is still room for improvement in devising a production that suppresses the monotony of the game .

The present invention has been made focusing on such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest while suppressing the monotony of a game.

The lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winning, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the result suggestion means that suggests the result of the lottery when the operation means is operated, and the result of the lottery by the lottery means are shown. A gaming machine provided with an advantageous gaming state control means for starting an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the advantageous gaming state is achieved by lottery by the lottery means. When the game determined to be controlled ends and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the advantageous gaming state is always controlled, and the timing before the result of the lottery by the lottery means is shown. It is possible to recognize that the game is controlled to the advantageous game state, and while the control to the advantageous game state is recognizable, the operation instruction display to the operation means is displayed by the lottery by the lottery means. It is possible to display the game in the middle of the game determined to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying that the game is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, and the game is controlled to the advantageous gaming state. Although the notification effect for notifying that the game is controlled to the advantageous gaming state at a timing before the result of the lottery by the lottery means is shown, the notification effect is performed at the timing. An effect that is always executed after the result of the lottery of the game determined to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state by the lottery by the lottery means without being executed is shown and before the next game of the game is started. In a game determined to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state by a lottery by the lottery means, the operation instruction display displayed in the middle of the game is displayed on a predetermined liquid crystal display device before the operation instruction display is displayed. It is possible to show the reach mode to the player by the displayed decorative symbol, and the reach mode is continuously displayed even after the operation instruction display displayed in the middle of the game is displayed, and the lottery means. Before the operation instruction display displayed in the middle of the game determined to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state by the lottery is displayed, the operation instruction display in a mode different from the operation instruction display is displayed in the lottery. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be displayed in the middle of a game in which it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state by lottery by means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest while suppressing the monotony of the game .

It is a front view which showed the transparent part as opaque in the slot machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the slot machine from the front in the state of FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the slot machine from the back. It is a front view which showed the rear of the transparent part in the slot machine of FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the slot machine from the front in the state of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the slot machine for each main configuration and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a slot machine disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a cross-sectional view of the right side view of the slot machine cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right side. (A) is a perspective view of the door unit in the slot machine as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door unit for each main composition and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door unit for each main composition and looked at from the back. It is a right side sectional view seen from the right side which cut the top cover unit in the door unit in the center in the left-right direction. It is a front view which shows the state that the light guide plate in a top cover unit is made to emit light. (A) is a front view of the front movable effect unit in the door unit, and (b) is a front view of the front movable effect unit shown in a state where the front movable ornament is lowered from the state of (a). (A) is a front view of the middle unit in the slot machine, and (b) is a rear view of the middle unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the middle unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the middle unit from the right rear. It is a perspective view of the middle unit seen from the left rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the middle unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the middle unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a perspective view seen from the front with the lateral movable effect unit and the state indicator attached to the middle unit base in the middle unit. It is a perspective view seen from the rear with the lateral movable effect unit and the state indicator attached to the middle unit base in the middle unit. (A) is a perspective view of the central movable effect unit in the middle unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the central movable effect unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the central movable production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the central movable production unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the advancing / retreating unit in the central movable effect unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the advancing / retreating unit in the central movable effect unit as seen from the back. It is a perspective view seen from the front with the wiring member held by the advance / retreat unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the advancing / retreating unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the advancing / retreating unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a cross-sectional view of an advancing / retreating unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a part of (a) in an enlarged manner. (A) is a front view showing a schematic configuration in a normal state of a central movable effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing a guiding portion for guiding an advancing / retreating unit in the central movable effect unit. It is a front view which shows the schematic structure in the state which the advance / retreat unit is advanced in the central movable production unit. It is a front view which shows the 2nd Embodiment of the central movable production unit schematicly. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper movable production unit in the middle unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper movable production unit from the back. It is a front view of the upper movable effect unit which shows the movement of the upper lateral movable effect unit in the upper movable effect unit. It is a front view which shows the upper middle movable effect unit in the upper movable effect unit in the schematic structure. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the upper-middle movable effect unit in the retracted state from the front, and (b) shows the upper-middle movable effect unit in the state of appearing halfway from the state of (a) from the front. It is an explanatory diagram, and (c) is an explanatory diagram which shows the upper-middle movable effect unit in an appearance state schematicly from the front. It is a front view of the upper movable effect unit which shows the state which moved the upper-middle movable decorative body to the center side, and also moved the upper-middle movable decorative body of the upper-middle movable effect unit to the appearance position. It is a front view of the slot machine which shows the state that the front movable decorative body of a front movable effect unit is positioned at a descending end. It is a front view of the slot machine which shows the state that the central movable decorative body unit of the central movable effect unit is positioned at the rising end. It is a front view of the slot machine which shows the state which moved the upper middle left decorative body and the upper middle right decorative body from the state of FIG. 41 to the appearance position. FIG. 4 is a front view of a slot machine showing a state in which a pair of upper and lateral movable decorative bodies 612 of the upper movable effect unit is moved to the center side from the state of FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a front view of a slot machine showing a state in which a sub-left liquid crystal display device and a sub-right liquid crystal display device of the lateral movable effect unit are upright from the state of FIG. 43. It is a front view of the slot machine which shows the state that the sub-left liquid crystal display device and the sub-right liquid crystal display device of the horizontal movable effect unit are lowered to the front side of the symbol display area while extending horizontally. It is a front view of the slot machine which shows the state that the sub-left liquid crystal display device and the sub-right liquid crystal display device of the horizontal movable effect unit are upright and are located on the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display device. It is a front view of the slot machine which shows the state that the sub-left liquid crystal display device and the sub-right liquid crystal display device of the horizontal movable effect unit are lowered from the state of FIG. 46 and are located on both the left and right sides of the symbol display area. It is a front view of the slot machine which shows the state which the light guide plate of a top cover unit is light-emitting and decorated. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. equipped in a slot machine. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the symbol string provided on the outer peripheral surface of each reel in a slot machine. It is a hit value judgment table. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of one basic game in a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the start processing. This is an example of a block diagram showing a transition of a gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the rough processing flow of instruction function processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a reel stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production example of the promotion production. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the bonus game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the bonus game end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of ART game determination processing. It is a figure which shows the chance meter lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a normal state processing. It is a figure which shows the chance zone and ART lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a chance zone processing. It is a figure which shows the chance mode up lottery table. It is a figure which showed the addition probability of the ART game in the chance zone for each mode. It is a figure which shows the symbol matching game in mode 0. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 1. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 2. It is a figure which shows the symbol matching game in mode 0. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 1. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 2. It is a figure which shows the symbol matching game in mode 0. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 1. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 2. It is a figure which shows the symbol matching game in mode 0. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 1. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 2. It is a figure which shows the symbol matching game in mode 0. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 1. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 2. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 1. It is a figure which shows the pattern matching game in mode 2.

[1. Overall configuration of slot machine]
Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings with reference to the drawings, taking the slot machine 1 as an example. First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a transparent portion as opaque in a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine as viewed from the front in the state of FIG. 1, and FIG. 3 is a slot. It is a perspective view of the machine seen from the back. Further, FIG. 4 is a front view showing the rear of the transparent portion in the slot machine of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the slot machine as viewed from the front in the state of FIG. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the right side of the slot machine seen from the right side by cutting the slot machine at the center in the left-right direction.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a box-shaped housing unit 2 installed in a game hall or the like and having an open front surface, a game unit 3 housed in the housing unit 2, and a game unit 3 in front of the game unit 3. It mainly includes a door unit 4 that opens and closes an opening on the front surface of the housing unit 2 so as to be visible from the outside, and a middle unit 5 that is attached to the rear side of the door unit 4. ..

The housing unit 2 will be described in detail later, but includes a box-shaped housing body 10, a main control unit 20 for controlling a game, and a payout unit 30 for storing and paying out medals as a game medium. It includes a power supply unit 50 for supplying power to the main control unit 20, the payout unit 30, and the like, and a switch unit 60 for turning on / off the power supply and setting the game content. The main control unit 20, the payout unit 30, the power supply unit 50, and the switch unit 60 are mounted in the housing body 10.

The game unit 3 has three reels 70 arranged side by side with a plurality of symbols from a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface, and a reel drive mechanism 80 for independently rotating the three reels 70, although the details will be described later. , A unit base 90 for mounting the three reels 70 and the reel drive mechanism 80 in the housing unit 2.

The door unit 4 will be described in detail later, but is located on the rear side of the door body unit 100 that opens and closes the front opening of the housing unit 2, the top cover unit 200 that is attached to the upper part of the door body unit 100, and the top cover unit 200. It is equipped with a front movable effect unit 300 to be attached. The door body unit 100 stores the operation unit 120 operated by the player to rotate and stop the three reels 70 of the game unit 3 and the medals paid out from the payout unit 30. The dish unit 150 and the above are provided.

The details of the middle unit 5 will be described later, but the middle unit base 400 attached to the door unit 4, the main liquid crystal display device 450 capable of displaying the effect image, the peripheral control unit 470 for controlling the effect, and the central movable unit 5. It includes an effect unit 500, an upper movable effect unit 600, a lateral movable effect unit 700, and a state display 800 for displaying a game state.

[2. Overall configuration of housing unit]
Subsequently, the overall configuration of the housing unit 2 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8. The housing unit 2 has a box shape with an open front surface, and the game unit 3 is housed inside, and the front opening is closed by the door unit 4 so as to be openable and closable. The housing unit 2 has a box-shaped housing body 10 having an open front surface, a main control unit 20 attached to the upper part of the housing body 10 to control the game content, and a lower part of the housing body 10. A payout unit 30 that is attached to the center and receives medals inserted as a game medium and pays out medals according to the game result, and a payout unit 30 that is attached to the right side of the front view of the payout unit 30 in the housing body 10. A storage box 40 for storing medals overflowing from 30, a power supply unit 50 attached to the left side of the front view of the payout unit 30 in the housing body 10, and a power supply unit 50 in the housing body 10 to control the power supply. The switch unit 60, which is attached to the front side of the switch unit 60, is provided.

[2-1. Housing body]
The housing body 10 of the housing unit 2 has a front surface that is open and extends vertically to form a box shape. As shown in the figure, the housing body 10 includes a flat plate-shaped bottom plate 11 forming a bottom, a pair of flat plate-shaped side plates 12 rising upward from the left and right ends of the bottom plate 11, and a pair of side plates 12. Closes the flat top plate 13 that connects the upper end sides of the top plate to form the top, and the front-view rectangular rear end opening formed by the top plate 13, the pair of side plates 12, and the bottom plate 11. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped back plate 14 and a partition plate 15 for partitioning the inside into upper and lower parts, and is formed in a box shape with an open front surface. The housing body 10 is inclined so that the front end sides of the pair of side plates arranged on the left and right sides are located behind the lower end. The game unit 3 is mounted on the partition plate 15 in the housing body 10.

Further, the housing body 10 is provided with a handle 16 extending in the front-rear direction and recessing from the outside to the inside at substantially the center of the pair of side plates 12 in the vertical direction. Further, the housing body 10 is attached to the front end of the side plate 12 on the left side of the front view, and is attached to the hinge metal fitting 17 for attaching the door unit 4 so as to be rotatable by the hinge, and inside the front end of the side plate 12 on the right side of the front view. It includes a locking piece (not shown) to which the locking hook 182 of the locking unit 180 in the cage door unit 4 is locked.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the housing body 10 has a supply hole 14a penetrating back and forth at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the hopper 32 in the payout unit 30 described later at the center in the left-right direction of the back plate 14. It is provided with a replenishment lid 18 that can be opened and closed. The replenishment lid 18 has a frame-shaped mounting frame portion 18a that is detachably attached to the replenishment hole 14a of the back plate 14 and is rotatably attached along the upper edge in the mounting frame portion 18a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped door portion 18b that can be closed inside. The replenishment lid 18 has a mounting frame portion 18a and a door portion 18b integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the door portion 18b can be opened and closed with respect to the mounting frame portion 18a due to plastic deformation of the synthetic resin. can.

Explaining the operation of the replenishment lid 18, when the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is installed in an island facility equipped with an automatic replenishment device for medals, the door portion 18b of the replenishment lid 18 is rotated inward of the housing body 10. The inside of the frame of the mounting frame portion 18a is opened, and the replenishment duct of the automatic replenishing device is inserted into the housing main body 10 through the frame of the open mounting frame portion 18a. As a result, medals from the automatic replenishment device can be replenished in the hopper 32 via the replenishment duct. On the other hand, when the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is installed in an island facility not provided with an automatic replenishment device, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is used in a state where the inside of the frame of the mounting frame portion 18a is closed by the door portion 18b, and the mounting frame portion is used. It is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering the housing body 10 through the frame of 18a. In the island equipment not equipped with the automatic replenishment device, when replenishing the medals to the hopper 32, the door unit 4 is opened and the medals are replenished from the front of the housing body 10.

According to this replenishment lid 18, when the replenishment duct of the automatic replenishment device is inserted, the replenishment duct can be inserted into the housing body 10 by opening the door portion 18b without removing the replenishment lid 18 from the housing body 10. It is possible to eliminate the trouble of storing the replenishment lid removed while the slot machine 1 is in use, and it is possible to eliminate the risk of the replenishment lid being lost due to the removal of the replenishment lid.

In the present embodiment, the replenishment lid 18 is provided with a door portion 18b that can be opened and closed, but the replenishment lid that is not provided with the door portion 18b that can be opened and closed by filling the inside of the frame of the mounting frame portion 18a. It may be. In this case, by removing the replenishment lid from the housing body 10 to open the replenishment hole 14a and passing the replenishment duct through the replenishment hole 14a, it is possible to cope with the island equipment equipped with the automatic replenishment device.

[2-2. Main control unit]
As shown in FIG. 8, the main control unit 20 of the housing unit 2 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the back plate 14 in the housing main body 10. The main control unit 20 includes a main control board 21 for controlling the game content and paying out medals as a game medium, a main control board box 22 containing the main control board 21, and a main control board 21. A sub-main control board 23 having a control ROM in which programs and data used for control in the above are stored in advance, a sub-main control board box 24 containing the sub-main control board 23, and a main control board box 22. A plate-shaped mounting base 25 to which the sub-main control board box 24 is mounted and mounted on the back plate 14 of the housing body 10, and the mounting base 25 straddling the main control board box 22 and the sub-main control board box 24. It includes a box cover 26 to be attached.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 21 is formed in a rectangular shape having a front view extending to the left and right, and a plurality of connectors used for input / output are attached to the vicinity of the lower end of the front surface. The main control board box 22 accommodates the main control board 21 so that the input / output connectors of the main control board 21 face forward. Further, the main control board box 22 is formed so as to be divisible in the front-rear direction and to leave a trace of the division (opening / closing). The main control board box 22 is detachably mounted on the upper part of the front surface of the mounting base 25. The main control board box 22 and the mounting base 25 are formed so as to leave traces of mounting and removal.

The sub-main control board 23 is formed in a rectangular shape having a front view extending to the left and right, and a plurality of connectors used for input / output are attached to the vicinity of the upper end of the front surface. The sub-main control board box 24 accommodates the sub-main control board 23 so that the input / output connectors of the sub-main control board 23 face forward. Further, the sub-main control board box 24 is formed so as to be divisible in the front-rear direction and to leave traces of opening and closing. The sub-main control board box 24 is detachably mounted on the lower front surface of the mounting base 25 which is the lower side of the main control board box 22. The sub-main control board box 24 and the mounting base 25 are formed so as to leave traces of mounting and removal.

The main control board box 22 and the sub main control board box 24 are mounted side by side on the front surface of the mounting base 25. The box cover 26 covers a plurality of connectors of the main control board 21 facing forward from the main control board box 22 and a plurality of connectors of the sub main control board 23 facing forward from the sub main control board box 24. As described above, it is detachably attached to the attachment base 25. The box cover 26 and the mounting base 25 are formed so as to leave traces of mounting and removal.

[2-3. Payout unit]
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 8, the payout unit 30 of the housing unit 2 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom plate 11 at substantially the center in the left-right direction in the housing main body 10, and is attached to the upper surface of the bottom plate 11. The medals as a game medium that have been thrown into the door and distributed by the medal selector 170 are stored, and the stored medals are paid out to the saucer 151 of the door unit 4. The payout unit 30 is attached to a unit main body 31 attached to the upper surface of the bottom plate 11 and an upper portion of the unit main body 31, and is open upward and narrowed as the lower portion moves downward to receive a medal. A plurality of accommodating portions 33a that are rotatably attached to the unit main body 31 at the lower end portion of the hopper 32 and the possible hopper 32, and penetrate the unit body 31 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the medal. A disk-shaped payout rotating body 33 having a It is provided with a payout outlet 35 which is open to the front surface of the payout unit main body 31 for paying out the medals housed in the portion 33a.

After being inserted into the slot of the door unit 4, the payout unit 30 can receive the medals distributed by the selector by the hopper 32 and store the medals in the hopper 32. When the inside of the hopper 32 is full of medals, the overflowing medals are discharged into the storage box 40 from the discharge port (not shown) of the hopper 32. Further, the payout unit 30 rotates the payout rotating body 33 by the payout motor 34 in response to the payout command from the main control board 21 to pay out the medals stored in the hopper 32, and pays out the medals from the payout outlet 35. .. The medals paid out from the discharge port 35 are supplied (paid out) into the saucer 151 through the discharge port 112 of the door unit 4. The payout unit 30 can pay out medals one by one by driving the payout motor 34.

The storage box 40 from which the medals overflowing from the hopper 32 of the payout unit 30 are discharged is formed in a box shape with an open upper part. A pair of detection rods (not shown) separated vertically are inserted in the storage box 40. The pair of detection rods are each connected to the main control board 21, and the medals are stored in the storage box 40 so as to fill the space between the pair of detection rods so that the pair of detection rods come into contact with each other. When it becomes possible to energize between the pair of detection rods through the plurality of medals, it is determined that the storage box 40 is full of medals on the main control board 21, and the player or the game hall side is notified to that effect. ..

[2-4. Power supply unit]
The power supply unit 50 of the housing unit 2 is for supplying power to various electric components provided in the slot machine 1 such as the main control unit 20, the payout unit 30, the door unit 4, and the middle unit 5. Is. The power supply unit 50 is attached to the lower part of the side plate 12 on the left side when viewed from the front in the housing body 10. The power supply unit 50 includes a power supply board (not shown) for supplying power, and a power supply board box 52 that covers the power supply board and is attached to the side plate 12 in the housing body 10. The power supply board is entirely covered with the power supply board box 52.

[2-5. Switch unit]
The switch unit 60 of the housing unit 2 is attached to the front of the power supply unit 50 in the housing main body 10 and at the lower inside of the side plate 12 on the left side when viewed from the front. The switch unit 60 includes a power switch 61 of the slot machine 1 and a setting switch 62 for setting the game content. The power switch 61 and the setting switch 62 are covered with a cover that can be opened and closed.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the setting switch 62 of the switch unit 60 is composed of a key switch and a button switch. By inserting a specific key into the key switch and turning it, the setting switch 62 can be turned from OFF to ON. Button switch operations can be accepted. By operating the setting switch 62, the slot machine 1 can be reset or the game mode can be changed. The game mode set by the setting switch 62 is displayed in Arabic numerals on the setting display 810 of the status display 800 of the middle unit 5.

[3. Game unit]
Subsequently, the game unit 3 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8. The housing body supports three cylindrical reels 70, a reel drive mechanism 80 to which each reel 70 can be rotationally driven, and three reel drive mechanisms 80 so that each reel 70 is coaxially aligned. It includes a unit base 90 attached to the upper surface of the partition plate 15 in 10. The game unit 3 includes three reels 70 arranged in the left-right direction, and is referred to as a left reel 70L, a middle reel 70M, and a right reel 70L from the left when viewed from the front.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reel 70 of the game unit 3 is a reel main in which the tips of a plurality of spokes (five in this example) radially extending from a disk-shaped hub are connected to each other by an annular rim. An annular reel subframe (not shown) that is axially separated from the frame 71 and the reel main frame 71 and is arranged coaxially and has the same outer diameter as the rim, and the reel subframe and reel. It is provided with a cylindrical reel cylinder 73 that is connected to the rim of the main frame 71 and has translucency. The reel main frame 71 includes a flat plate-shaped detection piece projecting from one of the plurality of spokes toward the reel subframe side. A translucent symbol sheet (not shown) is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel cylinder 73 of the reel 70, in which a sequence of symbols (see FIG. 50) in which a plurality of symbols are arranged in a row is printed.

The reel drive mechanism 80 of the game unit 3 protrudes at a right angle from one surface of the plate-shaped drive base 81 attached to the unit base 90 and the drive base 81 so that the hub of the reel main frame 71 in the reel 70 can rotate. A columnar shaft portion 82 to support, a reel motor 83 attached to the drive base 81 so that the rotating shaft protrudes on the same surface side as the shaft portion 82 protruding side of the drive base 81, and a reel motor 83. The drive gear (not shown) that is attached to the rotary shaft of the above, the driven gear 85 that meshes with the drive gear and is attached to the hub of the reel main frame 71 in the reel 70, and the shaft portion 82 in the drive base 81 project. It is provided with a reel rotation detection sensor 86 which is attached to the surface on the side of the reel 70 and can detect a detection piece of the reel main frame 71 in the reel 70.

Further, the reel drive mechanism 80 is attached to the surface of the drive base 81 on the protruding side of the shaft portion 82, and is attached to the box-shaped reflector 87 whose front side is open in the assembled state and to the rear side of the reflector 87. It is equipped with a reel decorative board 88, which is attached and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The open front side of the reflector 87 is formed in a curved shape so as to be along the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical reel cylinder 73 in the reel 7. Further, the reflector 87 is equally divided into three with respect to the circumferential direction of the inner peripheral surface of the reel cylinder 73. The reel decorative substrate 88 is mounted with LEDs such as for each of the three divided portions of the reflector 87.

The reel drive mechanism 80 is assembled so that the drive base 81 is located on the outer side of the reel subframe side in the axial direction of the reel 70. Further, in the assembled state, the reflector 87 is located inside the reel cylinder 73 between the reel main frame 71 and the reel subframe in the reel 70. As a result, when the LED of the reel decoration substrate 88 is made to emit light, a part of the reel cylinder 73 (design sheet) can be made to emit light from the inside.

The unit base 90 of the game unit 3 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface, and the inner peripheral shape in the side view substantially matches the outer peripheral shape of the drive base 81 in the reel drive mechanism 80. In this unit base 90, three reel drive mechanisms 80, each of which is rotatably mounted with reels 70, can be mounted coaxially with respect to an axis extending in the left-right direction of each reel 70. .. Further, the unit base 90 is formed so that about 1/3 of the outer peripheral surface of the reel 70 is exposed to the front in a state where the reel 70 is mounted inside via the reel drive mechanism 80.

A symbol sheet having a different arrangement of symbols is attached to each of the three reels 70 in the game unit 3 (see FIG. 50). In the game unit 3, the reel motor 83 is a stepping motor, and the detection piece of the reel main frame 71 is detected by the reel rotation detection sensor 86, so that the rotation angle of the reel 70 is accurately controlled by the main control board 21. It is possible to stop the rotation of the reel 70 (the symbol applied to the symbol sheet) at a desired rotation angle.

The game unit 3 can changely display three symbol rows by the three reels 70 by rotating the three reels 70 arranged side by side by the reel motor 83 of the reel drive mechanism 80. In the soil and game unit 3 to be described in detail, the three reels 70 arranged side by side are moved from top to bottom by a reel motor 83 so that a plurality of symbols (symbol rows) provided on the outer peripheral surface are moved from top to bottom in front view. By rotating it, the design can be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the game unit 3 can emit and decorate three symbols arranged in the circumferential direction (vertical direction) by the reflector 87 and the reel decorative substrate 88 arranged in each reel 70, and the three reels. The decorative substrate 88 can illuminate and decorate a total of nine symbols in three upper and lower stages arranged three on the left and right. The area that can be light-emitting decorated by the three reel decoration substrates 88 is the symbol display area A by the three reels 70 (see FIG. 4).

[4. Overall configuration of door unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the door unit 4 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. FIG. 9A is a perspective view of the door unit in the slot machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 9B is a perspective view of the door unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the door unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear.

The door unit 4 of the slot machine 1 closes the opening on the front surface of the box-shaped housing unit 2 so as to be openable and closable. The door unit 4 includes a door body unit 100 that can be opened and closed with respect to the front surface of the housing unit 2, a top cover unit 200 that is mounted on the upper front surface of the door body unit 100, a top cover unit 200, and a door body unit 100. It is equipped with a front movable effect unit 300, which is attached between the doors and the door. The front movable effect unit 300 is visibly attached from the player side (front side) through the top cover unit 200.

[4-1. Door body unit]
The door body unit 100 in the door unit 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 9 to 10. The door body unit 100 includes a door base 110 having a size capable of closing the front opening of the housing body 10 in the housing unit 2, an operation unit 120 attached to the front surface of the door base 110, and a lower side of the operation unit 120. It includes a front lower decorative unit 140 attached to the front surface of the door base 110, and a saucer unit 150 attached to the front surface of the door base 110 below the front lower decorative unit 140.

Further, the door body unit 100 includes a reinforcing unit 160 attached to the rear surface of the door base 110, a medal selector 170 attached to the rear surface of the door base 110, and a lock attached to the rear surface of the door base 110. It includes a unit 180 and a bass speaker 190 mounted on the rear surface of the door base 110. The bass speaker 190 is attached so as to radiate (output) sound forward between the front lower decorative unit 140 and the saucer unit 150 on the front surface of the door base 110.

[4-1a. Door base]
The door base 110 of the door body unit 4 is formed in such a size that the front opening of the housing body 10 in the housing unit 2 can be closed, and the external shape of the front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically. .. The door base 110 has a square-shaped opening 111 that penetrates back and forth from a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction to the upper side so that the peripheral edge remains thin. Further, the door base 110 further has a square-shaped discharge port 112 penetrating the front and back in a substantially center in the left-right direction in the front view below the opening 111. The door base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

[4-1b. Operation unit]
The operation unit 120 of the door body unit 4 is attached to the lower side of the opening 111 on the front surface of the door base 110. The operation unit 120 has a shelf portion 121 extending from the lower side of the opening 111 of the door base 110 so that the front end side is slightly lower, and a hanging portion 122 hanging downward from the front end of the shelf portion 121. It is provided and bulges forward from the front of the door base 110.

Further, the operation unit 120 is arranged at the insertion port 123 for inserting a medal as a game medium near the right end of the front view of the shelf portion 121, and at the center of the shelf portion 121 in the left-right direction of the front view on the left side of the insertion port 123. The effect button 124, the MAX bet button 125 located near the front end of the shelf 121 on the left side of the effect button 124, and the 1-bet button 126 located slightly to the left behind the MAX bet button 125. The bet button 126 and the MAX bet button 125 are provided with a cross key 127 arranged near the left end of the shelf on the left side.

Further, the operation unit 120 has three stop buttons 128 arranged horizontally in the center of the hanging portion 122 in the left-right direction in the front view, and a start button 128 arranged on the left side of the front view of the hanging button 128 and protruding forward from the hanging portion 122. It includes a lever 129, a clearing button 130 arranged on the left side of the starting lever 129 near the left end of the hanging portion 122, and a return button 131 arranged on the right side of the front view of the stop button 128.

The insertion slot 123 of the operation unit 120 is formed so that disc-shaped medals can be inserted one by one with the back surface facing in the front-rear direction. The medals inserted into the insertion slot 123 are distributed to the payout unit 30 side by a medal selector described later and stored in the hopper 32. Further, the medals inserted into the insertion slot 123 are detected in the medal selector 170, and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 21, so that the number of medals inserted in the main control board 21 is counted and stored. Will be done.

The effect button 124 is formed in a horizontally long elliptical shape in a plan view. In a normal state, the upper surface of the effect button 124 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the shelf portion 121, and protrudes higher than the upper surface of the shelf portion 121 depending on the gaming state so that the player can press the effect button 124. .. The effect button 124 is intended to be used by the player in the effect performed according to the game state. Further, although not shown, the effect button 124 is provided with a plurality of LEDs inside, and can be decorated by emitting light from the LEDs.

The MAX bet button 125 has a circular shape in a plan view and is smaller than the effect button 124, and can be pressed at all times. The MAX bet button 125 receives a pressing operation when the number of medals stored by being inserted into the insertion slot 123 in the main control board 21 is three or more. When the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 125 is accepted, the game is played by subtracting the maximum number of medals used for one game from the number of inserted medals stored in the main control board 21. You will be able to start. The MAX bet button 125 is provided with an LED inside, and can be decorated by emitting light from the LED.

The 1-bet button 126 has a circular shape in a plan view and is formed smaller than the MAX bet button 125. When the 1-bet button 126 is pressed when it can be accepted, one can be subtracted from the number of medals stored in the main control board 21 as the number of medals used for one game to start the game. It will be like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the cross key 127 has a circular middle button arranged in the center, a fan-shaped upper button and a lower button arranged on the upper side (rear side) and the lower side (front side) of the middle button, respectively. It has a total of five buttons, a fan-shaped left button and a right button arranged on the left and right sides of the middle button. The cross key 127 is intended to be used by the player in the production performed according to the gaming state.

Three stop buttons 128 are arranged side by side, and from the left side, the left stop button 128L, the middle stop button 128M, and the right stop button 128R are arranged. These three stop buttons 128 correspond to the three reels 70 (left reel 70L, middle reel 70M, right reel 70R) arranged side by side in the game unit 3, respectively, and perform a pressing operation while the reel 70 is rotating. This makes it possible to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel 70. Each stop button 128 is provided with an LED, and can be decorated by emitting light from the LED.

When the start lever 129 is operated when the MAX bet button 125 or the 1-bet button 126 can be operated to start the game after inserting the medal into the insertion slot 123, the control command from the main control board 21 is issued. Based on this, the three reels 70 of the game unit 3 are rotated to start the game. As the three reels 70 rotate, the symbols on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 70 are displayed in a variable manner.

The clearing button 130 dispenses the same number of medals as the number of medals stored in the main control board 21 by inserting the medals into the slot 123 from the payout unit 30 into the saucer 151, and is stored in the main control board 21. The number of medals is set to "0". The return button 131 is for returning the medals stored in the medal selector 170 to the saucer.

In this operation unit 120, the keyhole 185 of the locking unit 180 faces the right side of the front view of the return button 131.

[4-1c. Front lower decoration unit]
The front lower decorative unit 140 of the door body unit 100 bulges forward from the front surface of the door base 110 on the lower side of the operation unit 120 like the operation unit 120. The front lower decorative unit 140 has a translucent front lower decorative portion 141 extending downward from the lower end of the hanging portion 122 of the operation unit 120, and speakers 142 arranged on the left and right sides of the front lower decorative portion 141, respectively. And have.

Although not shown, the front lower decorative unit 140 is arranged behind the front lower decorative portion 141 and has a translucent decorative panel on which decorations according to the concept of the slot machine 1 are printed, and a decorative panel behind the decorative panel. It is provided with a front lower decorative board which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately causing the LED of the front lower decorative substrate to emit light, the front lower decorative portion 141 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The two speakers 142 can output sound in stereo by the sound signal from the peripheral control board. Further, the speaker 142 is covered on the front surface with a speaker cover made of punching metal.

[4-1d. Dishing unit]
The saucer unit 150 of the door body unit 100 is attached to the lower end of the front surface of the door base 110 with a space downward from the lower surface of the front lower decorative unit 140. The saucer unit 150 includes a dish-shaped saucer 151 that bulges forward from the front surface of the door base 110 and is open upward, and an ashtray 152 that is arranged on the left side of the saucer 151 when viewed from the front. There is. A discharge port 112 is arranged at a portion of the door base 110 forming the rear wall of the saucer 151, and the medals paid out from the payout unit 30 are discharged into the saucer 151 through the discharge port 112.

[4-1e. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 160 of the door body unit 100 is formed of a metal plate, and the door base 110 is reinforced from the rear side. The reinforcing unit 160 is attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door base 110, and has a rod-shaped left reinforcing metal fitting 161 that is hinge-rotatably attached to the hinge metal fitting 17 of the housing main body 10 in the housing unit 2. , A rod-shaped upper reinforcing metal fitting 162 attached along the upper side on the rear surface of the door base 110, a rod-shaped middle reinforcing metal fitting 163 attached along the lower side of the opening 111 on the rear surface of the door base 110, and the rear surface of the door base 110. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped lower reinforcing plate 164 attached to a portion below the front lower decorative unit 140.

The left reinforcing metal fitting 161, the upper reinforcing metal fitting 162, and the middle reinforcing metal fitting 163 in the reinforcing unit 160 are formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate. The middle unit 5, which will be described later, is attached to the upper reinforcing metal fitting 161 and the middle reinforcing metal fitting 163 of the reinforcing unit 160.

[4-1f. Medal Selector]
The medal selector 170 of the door body unit 100 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the door base 110 below the opening 111 and corresponding to the rear of the input port 123 of the operation unit 120. In a normal state, when a medal is inserted into the insertion slot 123 of the operation unit 120, the medal selector 170 guides the inserted medal to the payout unit 30 side to detect it, and then puts the inserted medal into the hopper 32 of the payout unit 30. discharge.

When the return button 131 of the operation unit 120 is pressed, the medal selector 170 distributes the medals stored in the medal selector 170 and the medals newly inserted into the insertion slot 123 to the saucer 151 side. Then, it is discharged into the saucer 151 from the door base 110 discharge port 112. That is, in the normal state, the medal selector 170 distributes the medals inserted into the insertion slot 123 to the payout unit 30 side.

[4-1 g. Locking unit]
The locking unit 180 of the door body unit 100 is attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door base 110. The locking unit 170 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the right side of the door base 110 when viewed from the front, and extends in the left-right direction near the upper and lower ends of the locking main body 181 attached to the rear surface of the door base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the locking main body 181. A pair of locking hooks 182 that are rotatably attached around the shaft and can be locked to a locking piece (not shown) of the housing body 10 and a pair of locking hooks 182 are rotated, respectively, to lock the locking body 181. A slide rod 183 that is slidably attached to the door, a lock cam 184 that slides the slide rod 183 along the locking body 181 by rotating around an axis that extends back and forth, and a keyhole 185 that opens at the front end. The lock cam 184 is rotatable by inserting a key into the door, and a locking cylinder (not shown) is provided in which the lock cam 184 is rotated by rotating the inserted key.

In the locking unit 180, when the open front surface of the housing unit 2 is closed by the door unit 4, the pair of locking hooks 182 are respectively locked to the locking pieces (not shown) of the housing unit 2 and are locked to the housing unit 2. On the other hand, the door unit 4 cannot be opened. In this state, when the key corresponding to the keyhole 185 of the locking unit 180 is inserted and rotated, the pair of locking hooks 182 are rotated respectively, the locking with the locking piece is released, and the housing unit is released. The door unit 4 can be opened with respect to 2.

In this locking unit 180, the locking body 181 and the like are formed of a metal plate, and by attaching to the rear surface of the door base 110, the door base 110 is reinforced together with the reinforcing unit 160.

[4-2. Top cover unit]
Subsequently, the top cover unit 200 of the door unit 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the right side of the door unit, which is a top cover unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right side. FIG. 13 is a front view showing a state in which the light guide plate of the top cover unit is made to emit light. The top cover unit 200 is attached to the upper front surface of the door body unit 100 so as to close the opening 111 of the door base 110.

The top cover unit 200 has a shallow box-shaped top cover 201 in which the opening 111 of the door base 110 in the door body unit 100 can be closed and the rear is open, and a transparent flat plate arranged in the top cover 201. A light guide plate 202, an upper presser member 203 having the upper end side of the light guide plate 202 attached to the top cover 201, a lower presser member 204 having the lower end side of the light guide plate 202 attached to the top cover 201, and an upper presser member. It is attached to the light guide plate upper decorative board 205 on which a plurality of LEDs that irradiate light from the upper side toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 202 are mounted, and is attached to the lower presser member 204, and is guided from the lower side. It includes a light guide plate lower decorative substrate 206 on which a plurality of LEDs that irradiate light toward the lower surface of the light plate 202 are mounted.

The top cover 201 is substantially entirely transparent except for the four corners. The top cover 201 rises substantially vertically when assembled in the slot machine 1, and has a flat window portion 201a having substantially the same size as the opening 111 of the door base 110.

The light guide plate 202 is formed to have substantially the same size as the window portion 201a of the top cover 201, and is attached to the top cover 201 in parallel with the window portion 201a by the upper pressing member 203 and the lower pressing member 204. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the light guide plate 202 includes a decorative layer having a plurality of minute and transparent dots on one surface (rear surface). In the normal state where the LEDs of the light guide plate upper decorative substrate 205 and the light guide plate lower decorative substrate 206 do not emit light, the light guide plate 201 cannot visually recognize the dots of the decorative layer from the player side, and the rear side is It is in a transparent state that can be seen as it is. The dots of the decorative layer in the light guide plate 202 are formed by printing technology.

The light guide plate 202 irradiates light from the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside by the LEDs of the decorative substrate 205 on the light guide plate and the decorative substrate 206 below the light guide plate, so that the light passing through the inside of the light guide plate 202 is forward by the dots of the decorative layer. It can be reflected to make each dot shine, and a pattern or the like represented by a plurality of dots can be luminescently decorated (see FIG. 13). In addition, in FIGS. 13 and 48, the minute black dots representing the pattern are actually shining at the dots, and the rear ones can be seen through the white portion. The light guide plate 202 has a non-decorative region 202a in the decorative layer, which has no dots in a range extending from the lower side to the left and right at a predetermined height (see FIG. 13). Therefore, when the decorative layer of the light guide plate 202 is light-emitting-decorated, at least the inside of the non-decorative region 202a does not emit light at all, so that what is arranged behind the non-decorative region 202a can be satisfactorily visually recognized.

The non-decorative region 202a of the light guide plate 202 corresponds to the lower region in the upper and lower three-tiered symbol display region A displayed by the three reels 70 (symbol rows) arranged on the left and right sides of the game unit 3. That is, when the decoration (pattern) of the decorative layer of the light guide plate 202 is light-emittingly decorated, only the symbol located in the lower row among the plurality of symbols displayed by the three reels 70 through the non-decorative region 202a is on the player side. Can be seen well from (see FIG. 48). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the details will be described later, but in the symbol display area A consisting of three rows of left and right and three stages of upper and lower, only the lower stage (lower line) is regarded as an effective line, and the design of the light guide plate 202 is displayed. When the light-emitting decoration is applied, only the symbols located on the effective line can be visually recognized well, and the privilege described later is given according to the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed side by side in the lower row (effective line).

Although not shown, the light guide plate 202 has reflective layers on both the left and right sides. This reflective layer prevents the light emitted from the upper surface and the lower surface by the LEDs of the decorative substrate 205 on the light guide plate and the decorative substrate 206 below the light guide plate from leaking to the outside from both the left and right sides of the light guide plate 202. It can be reflected inward, and the pattern of the decorative layer can be luminescent and decorated more brightly, and the entire pattern can be luminescently decorated more uniformly.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 205 on the light guide plate and the decorative substrate 206 below the light guide plate are mounted on the lower surface and the upper surface, respectively, in a row in the left-right direction. The LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 205 above the light guide plate and the decorative substrate 206 below the light guide plate are high-brightness color LEDs or high-brightness LEDs that are monochromatic and colored (excluding white), and can be made to emit light. The pattern of the decorative layer of the light guide plate 202 can be entirely luminescent and decorated with a partially different color such as rainbow color, or the entire decorative layer can be luminescently decorated with a single color such as red or blue.

In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 202 having one decorative layer is shown. For example, one light guide plate may have a plurality of decorative layers having different patterns from each other, or may have decorative layers having different patterns. It is also possible to provide a plurality of light guide plates so that each decorative layer can be independently luminescently decorated on the decorative substrate on the light guide plate and the decorative substrate under the light guide plate. As a result, by making the decorative layer that emits light and decorates different according to the game state, it is possible to display different patterns according to the game state, and it is possible to present a more diverse effect to the player and make the player less bored. be able to. In addition, if the top cover unit can display a short video in front of the reel 70 as a different pattern, as a pattern of different frames of continuous moving images, the player is surprised. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[4-3. Front movable production unit]
The front movable effect unit 300 in the door unit 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 10, 11, and 14. 14 (a) is a front view of the front movable effect unit in the door unit, and FIG. 14 (b) is a front view of the front movable effect unit shown in a state where the front movable ornament is lowered from the state of (a). The front movable effect unit 300 is attached to the rear side of the top cover unit 200 and to the front surface of the door base 110 of the door body unit 100 where the opening 111 is formed.

The front movable effect unit 300 is arranged on the rear side of the unit base 301, which is formed in a frame shape with a substantially quadrangular front view shape, and is at least a front movable decorative body decorated on the front surface. It includes a 310 and an elevating drive mechanism 320 that raises and lowers the front movable decorative body 310 according to the gaming state.

The unit base 301 of the front movable effect unit 300 is attached to the upper front surface of the door body unit 100 where the opening 111 of the door base 110 is formed. The unit base 301 is formed to be slightly larger than the inner peripheral shape of the opening 111 of the door base 110. In the frame-shaped unit base 301, the portion forming the upper side has a larger width (upper and lower dimensions) than the portion forming the other side. The unit base 301 is transparently formed.

The front movable decorative body 310 is formed to have substantially constant dimensions in the vertical direction, and is formed to be slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the left-right dimensions of the unit base 301, and extends long to the left and right. The vertical dimension of the front movable decorative body 310 is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the portion forming the upper side of the unit base 301. The front movable decorative body 310 is formed in an outer shape in which the vicinity of the left end on the lower side protrudes downward when viewed from the front. The front movable decorative body 310 is formed in a shape imitating a machete (machete) with the left side of the front view as the tip side as an item in line with the concept of the slot machine 1. Further, although not shown, the front movable decorative body 310 is provided with a front movable decorative body decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and can be light-emitting decorated by light emission of the plurality of LEDs.

The elevating drive mechanism 320 has upper and lower ends attached to the rear sides of the portions forming the left and right sides of the frame-shaped unit base 310, and the left and right ends of the front movable decorative body 310 are attached so as to be able to move up and down. A columnar slide shaft 321 and a pair of vertically separated pulleys 322 that are rotatably attached to the unit base 310 around an axis extending back and forth near the upper and lower ends of each of the left and right slide shafts 321. A drive belt 323 that is wound around a pair of pulleys 322 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and is partially attached to the left end or the right end of the front movable decorative body 310, and the left and right slide shafts 321 respectively. It is provided with a front left drive motor 324 and a front right drive motor 325 for rotationally driving the upper pulley 322 of the pulleys 322 which are attached to the unit base 310 near the upper end portion and are separated from each other in the vertical direction. ..

The front movable decorative body decorative substrate (not shown) of the front movable decorative body 310 in the front movable effect unit 300, the front left drive motor 324 and the front right drive motor 325 of the elevating drive mechanism 320, and the like are controlled by the peripheral control board 471.

Further, the front movable effect unit 300 is attached to both left and right sides of the front surface of the frame-shaped unit base 301, and includes a front side decorative member 330 having a three-dimensional decoration. The front side decorative member 330 extends up and down over substantially the entire height of the unit base 301. Further, the front side decorative member 330 is formed with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface thereof. The left and right front side decorative members 330 are located on both the left and right sides of the window portion 201a of the top cover 201 in the top cover unit 200 in a state of being assembled to the door unit 4, and decorate both the left and right sides of the window portion 201a. ing.

The front movable effect unit 300 is arranged between the light guide plate 202 of the top cover unit 200 and the game unit 3 and the middle unit 5. The three reels 70 of the game unit 3 and the two later-described two reels of the middle unit 4 are described. It is arranged in front of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. In the normal state of the front movable effect unit 300, as shown in FIG. 14A, the front movable decorative body 310 is located at the rising end. In this state, the lower end of the front movable decorative body 310 is located slightly below the lower side of the portion forming the upper side of the unit base 301. Although not shown, the front movable decorative body 310 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the transparent unit base 301 even in this state.

The front movable effect unit 300 rotates and drives the front left drive motor 324 and the front right drive motor 325 of the elevating drive mechanism 320 according to the gaming state, so that the front movable decorative body 310 located at the ascending end is moved to the descending end. It can be lowered to the position of (see FIG. 14 (b)). In the state where the front movable decoration 310 is located at the descending end, as shown in the figure, the portion near the downwardly extending left end of the front view on the lower side of the front movable decoration 310 is the lower side of the frame-shaped unit base 301. Most of the lower side of the front movable decoration 310 is separated from the lower side of the unit base 301 because it descends to the position of the part forming the unit base 301. That is, when the front movable decoration 310 is positioned at the descending end, a substantially quadrangular rear visible region 302 extending to the left and right where the rear can be seen is formed below the lower side of the front movable decoration 310.

The rear visible area 302 formed by the descent of the front movable decorative body 310 in the front movable effect unit 300 is a three-tiered upper and lower symbol display displayed by three reels 70 (symbol rows) arranged on the left and right sides of the game unit 3. It corresponds to the lower area in the area A. That is, when the front movable decorative body 310 is positioned at the descending end, only the symbol located at the lower stage among the plurality of symbols displayed by the three reels 70 through the rear visible area 302 is satisfactorily viewed from the player side. It can be visually recognized (see FIG. 40). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the details will be described later, but in the symbol display area A consisting of three upper and lower rows in three rows on the left and right, only the lower row (lower row line) is regarded as an effective line, and the front movable decorative body 310 is used. When it is positioned at the descending end, only the symbol located on the effective line can be clearly seen.

Further, the front movable effect unit 300 appropriately controls the front left drive motor 324 and the front right drive motor 325 by the peripheral control board, so that the front movable decorative body 310 is placed at an arbitrary position between the ascending end and the descending end. It can be stopped with. Therefore, since the front movable decorative body 310 can be stopped at various elevating positions and the front movable decorative body 310 can be raised and lowered in various patterns, various effects can be presented to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent people from getting bored and to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

[5. Overall configuration of medium unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the middle unit 5 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. FIG. 15A is a front view of the middle unit in the slot machine, and FIG. 15B is a rear view of the middle unit. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the middle unit viewed from the front, FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the middle unit viewed from the right rear, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the middle unit viewed from the left rear. Further, FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the middle unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the middle unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The middle unit 5 is attached to the rear side of the portion of the door body unit 100 of the door unit 4 where the opening 111 of the door base 110 is formed, and the player is given an effect image or a movable effect through the window portion 201a of the top cover 201. Etc. are presented.

The middle unit 5 includes a frame-shaped middle unit base 400 attached to the rear side of the door base 110, and a main liquid crystal display device 450 detachably attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the middle unit base 400 and capable of displaying an effect image. , The peripheral control unit 470 attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 450, the security member 490 that prevents the main liquid crystal display device 450 from being removed from the middle unit base 400, and the upper and lower parts on the front surface of the middle unit base 400. The central movable effect unit 500 mounted approximately in the center of the direction, the upper movable effect unit 600 mounted on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 450 at the upper rear surface of the middle unit base 400, and mounted on both the left and right sides of the front surface of the middle unit base 400. The horizontal movable effect unit 700, the status display 800 attached to the lower front end of the middle unit base 400, and the main liquid crystal display device 450 attached to and detached from the rear surface on the rear surface of the middle unit base 400. It comprises a decorative drive board unit 900, which is capable of being mounted.

[5-1. Medium unit base]
The middle unit base 400 of the middle unit 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 15 to 22. FIG. 21 is a perspective view seen from the front with the horizontal movable effect unit and the status indicator attached to the middle unit base in the middle unit, and FIG. 22 shows the horizontal movable effect unit and the state on the middle unit base in the middle unit. It is a perspective view seen from the back with the display attached. The middle unit base 400 is attached to the rear surface of the upper reinforcing metal fitting 162 and the middle reinforcing metal fitting 163 of the reinforcing unit 160 behind the opening 111 of the door base 110 in the door body unit 100 of the door unit 4.

The middle unit base 400 has a pair of flat plate-shaped side portions 401 that are separated from each other to the left and right and have a substantially constant front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction, and an upper connecting portion that connects the upper ends of the pair of side portions 401. It includes a 402, a middle connecting portion 403 that connects substantially the centers of the pair of side portions 401 in the vertical direction, and a lower connecting portion 404 that connects the lower ends of the pair of side portions 401. The upper connecting portion 402 is formed in a rod shape, and connects the rear portions at the upper ends of the pair of side portions 401. The middle connecting portion 403 connects the portions on the rear side in the front-rear direction from the center in the vertical direction of the pair of side portions 401. The middle connecting portion 403 is formed so as to extend horizontally from a position closer to the front of the center of the pair of side portions 401 to the rear and then to extend upward from the rear end, and the middle connecting portion 403 is formed. , The side cross-sectional shape is formed in a substantially L shape. The lower connecting portion 404 connects the front portions at the lower ends of the pair of side portions 401 to each other. Among them, the unit base 400 is formed in a frame shape having a substantially "day" shape when viewed from the front.

The middle unit base 400 has a pair of locking pieces 405 protruding forward from the upper surface near the left and right ends of the upper connecting portion 402, and a pair of lower parts protruding downward from the front ends of the left and right ends of the lower connecting portion 404. It is equipped with a mounting portion 406. The pair of locking pieces 405 are locked to the upper surface of the upper reinforcing metal fitting 162 in the reinforcing unit 160 of the door unit 4, and by locking to the upper reinforcing metal fitting 162, the middle unit 5 is attached to the door unit 4. At the time of mounting, the middle unit 5 can be positioned in the height direction with respect to the door unit 4, and the middle unit 5 can be hung so that the mounting work can be facilitated. In the middle unit base 400, the upper connecting portion 402 and the pair of lower mounting portions 406 are attached to the upper reinforcing metal fitting 162 and the middle reinforcing metal fitting 163 of the reinforcing unit 160 by screws (screws) (not shown).

Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the middle unit base 400 has a main liquid crystal display device 450 and decorations at a portion between the upper connecting portion 402 and the middle connecting portion 403 on the rear side of the side portion 401 on the left side of the front view. A plurality (here, four) of a plurality of bearing portions 407 for mounting the drive board unit 900 so as to be able to rotate the hinge are arranged vertically. The upper ends of each of these four bearing portions 407 are open. Of the four bearings 407 arranged vertically, the first and third bearings 407 from the top are for mounting the decorative drive board unit 900 so that the decorative drive board unit 900 can be hinged, and the second and fourth bearings from the top. The bearing portion 407 is for mounting the main liquid crystal display device 450 so as to be able to rotate the hinge.

The middle unit base 400 is provided with a lock mechanism 410 for detachably attaching the protruding piece 452 of the main liquid crystal display device 450 on the rear side of the side portion 401 on the right side of the front view. The lock mechanism 410 includes a lock lever 411 having an opening 411a that slides up and down and opens rearward at the top. This lock mechanism 410 is a state in which the lock lever 411 is slid downward, and the main liquid crystal display device 450, which is hingedly attached to the left end side of the front view by a bearing portion 407, is mounted so that the display screen faces the front. When the hinge is rotated (so as to close the opening between the upper connecting portion 402 and the middle connecting portion 403 in the middle unit base 400), the protruding piece 452 protruding outward from the right side of the front view of the main liquid crystal display device 450. Is inserted into the opening 411a of the lock lever 411. Then, when the lock lever 411 is slid upward in this state, the backward movement of the protruding piece 452 of the main liquid crystal display device 450 is restricted, and the main liquid crystal display device 450 is locked with respect to the middle unit base 400. It will be installed in the installed state.

Further, the middle unit base 400 is provided with a locking groove 415 for detachably mounting the decorative drive board unit 900 on the upper side of the lock mechanism 410 on the rear side of the side portion 401 on the right side of the front view. The locking groove 415 is formed in a groove shape recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and the locking portion of the decorative drive substrate unit 900 is elastically locked.

Further, the middle unit base 400 is located behind the side portion 401 on the left side when viewed from the front, and is below the third bearing portion 407 from the top among the four bearing portions 407 arranged vertically, that is, 3 from the top. A mounting recess 420 recessed from the rear surface to the front is provided between the fourth bearing portion 407 and the fourth bearing portion 407. A security member 490 is attached to the attachment recess 420.

[5-2. Main LCD display device]
The main liquid crystal display device 450 of the middle unit 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. The main liquid crystal display device 450 is attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the middle unit base 400, and is provided with a display screen for displaying an effect image on the front surface. The main liquid crystal display device 450 is long left and right in front view, capable of closing a substantially rectangular opening in front view formed by a pair of left and right side portions 401, an upper connecting portion 402, and a middle connecting portion 403 in the middle unit base 400. It is formed in a rectangular shape.

The main liquid crystal display device 450 is provided with a pair of hinge shaft portions 451 on the left side of the front view, which are vertically separated from each other and project outward and extend downward in a columnar shape. The pair of hinge shaft portions 451 are inserted into the second and fourth bearing portions 407 from the top among the four bearing portions 407 in the middle unit base 400. Further, the main liquid crystal display device 450 is provided with a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 452 projecting outward from substantially the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the front view. The protruding piece 452 is attached to the rear surface of the middle unit base 400 by the lock mechanism 410 of the middle unit base 400.

The main liquid crystal display device 450 is rotatably attached to the middle unit base 400 so as to open and close rearward by inserting the pair of hinge shaft portions 451 into the bearing portion 407 of the middle unit base 400.

[5-3. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 470 of the middle unit 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8, 15, 17, 20, 20 and the like. The peripheral control unit 470 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 450. The peripheral control unit 470 is the rear side of the peripheral control board 471 that controls the game content, the effect content, etc. based on the control commands from the main control board 21 and the sub main control board 23 of the main control unit 20, and the peripheral control board 471. A ROM board 472 that has a ROM in which control programs, effect images, effect sounds, etc. executed in the peripheral control board 471, the main control board 21, and the sub control board 23 are stored in advance. It is attached to the rear side of the peripheral control board 471, and in response to a control command from the peripheral control board 471, the main liquid crystal display device 450, the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R of the lateral movable effect unit 700. The display control board 473 that controls the effect image displayed on the display control board 473, and the peripheral control board box 474 that houses the peripheral control board 471, the ROM board 472, and the display control board 473 are provided.

The peripheral control board 471 is formed in a rectangular shape having a long left-right front view, and a plurality of input / output connectors are attached to the lower portion of the rear surface along the lower side. Further, the peripheral control board 471 projects rearward from between the plurality of input / output connectors, and includes a volume 471a for adjusting the volume (see FIG. 15B).

The peripheral control board box 474 is formed so that the input / output connector of the peripheral control board 471 and the volume 471a face rearward. The peripheral control board box 474 is formed so as to be divisible in the front-rear direction and to leave a trace of the division (opening / closing). The peripheral control board box 474 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 450 so as to leave a trace of removal by a member having the same configuration as the security member 490 described in detail later.

[5-4. Security materials]
The security member 490 of the middle unit 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 15, 18 to 20. The security member 490 is attached to the mounting recess 420 of the middle unit base 400 to prevent the main liquid crystal display device 450 mounted on the middle unit base 400 from being removed. The security member 490 includes a bottomed square cylindrical pedestal portion 491 and a cap 492 that closes the open side of the pedestal portion 491. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pedestal portion 491 of the security member 490 is provided with a through hole through which a screw can pass at the bottom and a pair of recessed recesses at a portion facing each other on the inner peripheral surface. There is.

The cap 492 of the security member 490 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape that can be inserted into the pedestal portion 491. Although not shown in detail, the cap 492 is provided with a pair of protruding protrusions on the outer peripheral surface near the open end portion at a portion facing each other. When the cap 492 is inserted into the pedestal portion 491 with the open side facing the pedestal portion 491 side, the pair of protrusions are elastically deformed and then protrude into the pair of recesses of the pedestal portion 491. The protrusion and the recess are engaged with each other, so that the cap 492 can be mounted in the pedestal portion 491.

In this security member 490, the hinge shaft portion 451 of the main liquid crystal display device 450 is inserted into the bearing portion 407 of the middle unit base 400, and the main liquid crystal display device 450 is hinge-rotatably attached to the middle unit base 400. In this state, only the pedestal portion 491 of the security member 490 is inserted into the mounting recess 420 with its bottomed end facing the mounting recess 420 of the middle unit base 400, and the side where the pedestal portion 491 is open. The screw inserted from (not shown) is screwed into the middle unit base 400 through the through hole at the bottom, and the pedestal portion 491 is attached to the mounting recess 420. As a result, on the upper side of the hinge shaft portion 451 inserted from the upper side into the fourth bearing portion 407 from the top, the square tubular pedestal portion 491 is in a state of protruding rearward from the mounting recess 420, so that the hinge shaft portion The upward movement of the 451 is blocked by the pedestal portion 491. As a result, the hinge shaft portion 451 cannot be removed from the bearing portion 407, so that the main liquid crystal display device 450 cannot be removed from the middle unit base 400.

After that, the cap 492 is inserted into the pedestal portion 491, and the protrusion of the cap 492 is locked in the concave portion of the pedestal portion 491. By attaching the cap 492 to the pedestal portion 491, the screw that attaches the pedestal portion 491 to the mounting recess 420 can be covered, and the screw cannot be removed from the rear side. In order to remove the screw attaching the pedestal portion 491, it is necessary to break the cap 492 inserted in the pedestal portion 491 and pull it out from the pedestal portion 491.

By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the peripheral control unit 470 attached to the main liquid crystal display device 450 has a control function and a ROM related to the game, the main liquid crystal display device 450 is a medium unit base. There is a risk of fraudulent activity such as removing from 400 and replacing it with an unauthorized main liquid crystal display device replaced with an unauthorized board or ROM. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device 450 is first mounted from the middle unit base 400 by mounting the security member 490 in the mounting recess 420 with the main liquid crystal display device 450 mounted on the middle unit base 400. Since it can be made difficult to remove, it is possible to hesitate to perform fraudulent acts such as removing the main liquid crystal display device 450, and it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts.

Further, even if the main liquid crystal display device 450 is removed, in order to remove the main liquid crystal display device 450, it is necessary to destroy the cap 492 of the security member 490 and remove the pedestal portion 491. Therefore, the middle unit Since the trace of the removal of the main liquid crystal display device 450 from the base 400 remains, it can be found that the fraudulent act of replacing the main liquid crystal display device 450 (peripheral control unit 470) has been performed. Therefore, the deterrence against fraudulent activity can be enhanced, and the fraudulent activity can be prevented as much as possible.

[5-5. Overall configuration of the central movable production unit]
The central movable effect unit 500 in the middle unit 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. FIG. 23 (a) is a perspective view of the central movable effect unit in the middle unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 (b) is a perspective view of the central movable effect unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the central movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the central movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 26 (a) is a perspective view of the advancing / retreating unit in the central movable effect unit from the front, and FIG. 26 (b) is a perspective view of the advancing / retreating unit in the central movable effect unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view seen from the front with the wiring member held by the advancing / retreating unit. Further, FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the advancing / retreating unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the advancing / retreating unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 30 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the advancing / retreating unit, and FIG. 30 (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a part of (a) in an enlarged manner. Further, FIG. 31 (a) is a front view showing a schematic configuration of the central movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 31 (b) is a front view showing a guide unit for guiding the advancing / retreating unit in the central movable effect unit. 32 is a front view showing a schematic configuration in a state where the advancing / retreating unit is advanced in the central movable effect unit.

The central movable effect unit 500 is attached to the upper surface (inside the L shape) of the middle connecting portion 403 in the middle unit base 400. The central movable effect unit 500 is attached to the middle unit base 400, and is attached to a base unit 510 that extends long to the left and right and an advancing / retreating unit 530 that is slidable in the left-right direction and has a tip protruding upward to the base unit 510. A central movable decorative unit 550 attached to the tip of the advance / retreat unit 530 and decorated at least on the front surface, an advance / retreat drive mechanism 570 attached to the base unit 510 to slide the advance / retreat unit 530, and the like. It is equipped with.

Further, the central movable effect unit 500 includes an elevating support mechanism 590 that supports elevating and lowering of the central movable decorative body unit 550 that moves up and down by the advancing / retreating unit 530 driven by the advancing / retreating drive mechanism 570.

[5-5a. Base unit]
The base unit 510 of the central movable effect unit 500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. The base unit 510 is formed in a shallow box shape extending to the left and right to accommodate the advance / retreat unit 530, and has an opening 510a on the upper surface at the center in the left-right direction so that the advance / retreat unit 530 can protrude upward. The advancing / retreating unit 530 is slidably mounted in the base unit 510. The base unit 510 includes a front base 511 extending to the left and right, and a rear base 512 attached to the rear side of the front base 511.

Further, the base unit 510 is formed on the rear surface of the front base 511 and the front surface of the rear base 512, respectively, and includes a guiding portion 513 that slidably guides the advancing / retreating unit 530. The guide portion 513 projects from the rear surface of the front base 511 and the front surface of the rear base 512, respectively, and is formed in a groove shape capable of accommodating and rolling the roller 536 of the advancing / retreating unit 530. The guide portion 513 is formed substantially symmetrically with the center of the base unit 510 in the left-right direction as a boundary (see FIG. 31 (b) and the like). The guide portion 513 has a pair of horizontal portions 513a extending horizontally from both left and right ends of the base unit 510 toward the center in the left-right direction, and a pair of horizontal portions 513a from the end near the center toward the center. A pair of first rising parts 513b extending diagonally upward and a pair of second rising parts 513c extending diagonally upward from the end near the center of the pair of first rising parts 513b toward the center. And has.

The horizontal portion 513a of the guide portion 513 has a length in the left-right direction of about 4/5 of the length of half of the entire guide portion 513 (the length from the center to the end in the left-right direction). The first rising portion 513b is inclined at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the length in the left-right direction is about 7/8 of the length from the end near the center of the horizontal portion 513a to the center. It is said to be the length of. The second rising portion 513c is inclined at an angle of 60 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

The guide unit 513 can slidably accommodate the advance / retreat unit 530. Further, the guiding portion 513 can slide (move) the advancing / retreating unit 530 in the horizontal direction by the horizontal portion 513a, and the advancing / retreating unit 530 is moved in the vertical direction from the horizontal direction by the first rising portion 513b and the second rising portion 513c. Can be slid to. As a result, when the guide unit 513 moves the advancing / retreating unit housed to the left and right to the center side in the left-right direction, the tip end side of the advancing / retreating unit 530 moves upward from the opening 510a of the base unit 510 in a state where they are in contact with each other at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to protrude.

In the front base 511 and the rear base 512, the base unit 510 penetrates back and forth at substantially the center of the horizontal portion 513a in the guide portion 513 in the vertical direction, and has a long hole-shaped slit extending over the entire length of the horizontal portion 513a. It is equipped with 514. Further, the base unit 510 includes a pair of guide grooves 515 extending in the front surface of the front base 511 on both upper and lower sides of the slit 514 over substantially the entire length in the left-right direction of the front base 511 and recessed toward the rear. ing. These pair of guide grooves 515 are for guiding the lower main body 575a of the lower slider 575 and the upper main body 576a of the upper slider 576 in the advance / retreat drive mechanism 570, which will be described later, in the left-right direction, respectively.

Further, the base unit 510 is attached to the front surface of the front base 511 and has a translucent flat plate-shaped base cover 520, and is attached to the rear surface of the front base 511 between the front base 511 and the rear base 512. It is sandwiched between the center left decorative board 521 and the center right decorative board 522 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the lower ends of the front base 511 and the rear base 512, and extends to the left and right and has multiple LEDs on the lower surface. Is provided with a reel lighting board 523 on which the above is mounted.

The base cover 520 is a quadrangle having a front view extending long to the left and right, and has an opening 520a cut out in a quadrangle from the upper side to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction. The left-right dimensions of the base cover 520 substantially match the left-right dimensions of the front base 511 and the rear base 512. Further, the vertical dimension of the base cover 520 is slightly larger than the vertical dimension of the front base 511 and the rear base 512. The opening 520a of the base cover 520 substantially coincides with the opening 510a of the base unit 510. Although not shown, the front surface of the base cover 520 is decorated according to the concept of the slot machine 1.

The central left decorative substrate 521 is attached to the left portion in the front left-right direction above the slit 514 on the rear surface of the front base 511. The central right decorative substrate 522 is attached to the right portion in the left-right direction in the front view above the slit 514 on the rear surface of the front base 511. The central right decorative substrate 522 is connected to the central rotary drive motor 554 of the central movable decorative unit 550 and the central movable decorative substrate (not shown) via a wiring member 525 (see FIG. 27).

The reel lighting substrate 523 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the front base 511 and the rear base 512. The reel lighting substrate 523 is attached between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 in a state of being inclined back and forth so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side. The reel lighting board 523 can directly and indirectly illuminate the three reels 70 in the game unit 3 from the front by causing the LED mounted on the lower surface to emit light. Indirectly illuminating means that the LED of the reel lighting substrate 523 can irradiate light diagonally downward and forward, so that the light from the LED is the transparent top cover of the top cover unit 200 in the door unit 4. The 201 and the light guide plate 202 are irradiated from the rear, and the light is reflected rearward by the top cover 201 and the light guide plate 202 to indirectly illuminate the three reels 70 from the front side.

[5-5b. Advance / retreat unit]
The advance / retreat unit 530 of the central movable effect unit 500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. The advancing / retreating unit 530 is accommodated in the base unit 510, and is capable of projecting upward (advancing / retreating) from the opening 510a in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the base unit 510. The advance / retreat unit 530 is composed of a left unit 530L arranged on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and a right unit 530R arranged on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. As for the advance / retreat unit 530, the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are each formed in a roller chain shape as shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the advancing / retreating unit 530 includes the outer first plate 531 and the outer second plate 532, which are spaced apart from each other, and the outer first plate 531 and the outer second plate 532. The inner first plate 533 and the inner second plate 534 arranged so as to be in contact with each other on the inner side, and the inner first plate 533 and the inner first plate 533 projecting from the vicinity of both ends of the outer first plate 531 toward the outer second plate 532. It comprises a connecting pin 535 that alternately rotatably connects the inner second plate 534 with the outer first plate 531 and the outer second plate 532. In other words, the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R of the advancing / retreating unit 530 are composed of a top composed of the outer first plate 351 and the outer second portion rate 352, and the inner first plate 533 and the inner second plate 534. The coma are alternately connected by the connecting pins 535, and can bend (have flexibility) in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the connecting pins 535.

Further, the advancing / retreating unit 530 connects the roller 536 to the outer first plate 531 and the roller 536, which are rotatably mounted coaxially with the connecting pin 535 on the outer sides of the outer first plate 531 and the outer second plate 532, respectively. It includes a screw 537 rotatably attached to the tip of the pin 535 and a magnet 538 attached to the outer first plate 531 and the inner first plate 533, respectively. Further, the advancing / retreating unit 530 is coaxial with the connecting pin 535 on the most proximal side of the plurality of connecting pins 535 in the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R, and protrudes outward from the outer first plate 531 respectively, which will be described later. It is provided with a columnar drive shaft 539 attached to the drive hole 575d of the lower slider 575 and the drive hole 576d of the upper slider 576.

The outer first plate 531 of the advancing / retreating unit 530 is formed in a horizontally long track shape when viewed from the front. The outer first plate 531 has a flat plate-shaped locking piece 531a extending rearward from the upper side in the center in the longitudinal direction and a bulging rearward from the lower side to the lower side of the locking piece 531a. A portion 531b, a storage recess 531c recessed from the rear surface of the bulging portion 531b toward the front and accommodating a magnet 538, and a regulation protrusion 531c protruding from the bulging portion 531b toward the connecting pins 535 on both sides. I have. The storage recess 531c of the outer first plate 531 is formed below the center in the vertical direction of the outer first plate 531.

Further, the outer first plate 531 has a short protrusion from the front surface to the front coaxially with the connecting pin 535, and includes a disk-shaped boss portion 531e for rotatably attaching the roller 536. The boss portion 531e is not provided in a portion coaxial with the connecting pin 535 on the most proximal side in the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R, and the rear end of the drive shaft 539 is inserted in the portion. The bearing hole 531f is provided.

The outer second plate 532 is provided with a mounting hole 532a into which the tip of the connecting pin 535 is inserted near both ends formed at the same length as the outer first plate 531. Further, the outer second plate 532 includes a holding portion 532b extending forward from the front surface to the lower side of the locking piece of the outer first plate 531. The holding portion 532b of the outer second plate 532 has a flat upper surface and a forward bulge in the outermost second plate 532 on the most proximal side in the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R, and the other outer second plate 532b. The plate 532 has a pair of rod-shaped shapes separated from each other to the left and right.

The inner first plate 533 is cut out in a fan shape along the outer peripheral edges of both ends of the semicircle and a pair of insertion holes 533a through which the connecting pins 535 are inserted back and forth near both ends of the semicircle. The regulation recess 533b, the bulging portion 533c that bulges rearward from the lower side to the vicinity of the upper side in the center of the longitudinal direction, and the bulging portion 533c that dents from the rear surface toward the front to accommodate the magnet 538. It is provided with a storage recess 533d. The storage recess 533d of the inner first plate 533 is formed below the center of the inner first plate 533 in the vertical direction.

The inner second plate 534 has a pair of insertion holes 534a that penetrate back and forth near both ends of the semicircle and into which connecting pins 535 are inserted, respectively, and extend forward from the upper side in the center of the longitudinal direction with a gap up and down. It is provided with a locking piece 534b and a sticking out piece.

The connecting pin 535 is columnar and has a step formed at the tip, and the roller 536 is rotatably attached by the small diameter portion which is the step at the tip. Further, the connecting pin 535 has a plurality of (here, four) ridges arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape, which protrudes outward and extends in the axial direction. is doing. These plurality of ridges extend to a position closer to the base end than the step at the tip of the connecting pin 535, and the mounting hole 532a of the outer second plate 532 is fitted between the tip of the ridge and the step. Further, the plurality of ridges are formed so as to abut on the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole 533a of the inner first plate 533 and the insertion hole 534a of the inner second plate 534. Of the plurality of connecting pins 535, the connecting pin 535 on the most proximal side (the rightmost side in the front view) of the right unit 530R is provided with a mounting boss 535a projecting rearward from the rear end in a columnar shape. There is. The end portion of the assist elastic body 596 of the elevating support mechanism 590, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment boss 535a.

In the advance / retreat unit 530 of the present embodiment, the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R have three sets of outer first plate 351 and outer second plate 352, and two sets of inner first play 533 and inner second plate 534. Each is composed. That is, the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are composed of three pieces composed of a set of outer first plate 531 and outer second plate 532, and a set of inner first plate 533 and inner second plate 534. It is composed of a total of five frames, including the two frames that were created. The left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are each formed to have a length longer than the height of the base unit 510 (the length is formed to be about twice the height of the base cover 520).

Next, the assembly of the advancing / retreating unit 530 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. In a state where the three outer first plates 351 are arranged at equal intervals in the left-right direction, from the rear surfaces of the ends that are close to each other. The connecting pins 535 protruding rearward are inserted into the insertion holes 533a at both ends of the inner first plate 533, and the three outer first plates 531 are connected by the two inner first plates 533.

In the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R, the connecting pin 535 on the most advanced side (center side in the left-right direction in the front view) is inserted into the pair of connecting holes 551a of the connecting base 551 in the central movable decorative unit 550, which will be described later. Let me.

In this state, the columnar magnets 538 are stored in the storage recess 531c of the outer first plate 531 and the storage recess 533d of the inner first plate 533, respectively. When storing the magnet 538, in the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R, the same pole is stored so as to face downward in one unit, and different poles are stored so as to face downward between the units. That is, for example, in the left unit 530L, the N pole is stored so as to face downward, and in the right unit 530R, the S pole is stored so as to face downward.

Subsequently, the inner second plate 534 is positioned directly behind each inner first plate 533, and the connecting pin 535 penetrating the pair of insertion holes 533a of the inner first plate 533, respectively, is provided with the pair of inner second plates 534. It is inserted into the insertion hole 534a of. Then, the front surface of the inner second plate 534 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the bulging portion 533c of the inner first plate 533, and the rear end opening of the storage recess 533d in which the magnet 535 is housed is opened by the inner second plate 534. While closing, the inner second plate 534 is attached to the inner first plate 533 using a machine screw (not shown).

After that, the outer second plate 532 is positioned directly behind each outer first plate 531, and the rear end of the connecting pin 535 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner second plate 534 is inserted into the mounting hole of the outer second plate 532. Insert through 532a. Then, the front surface of the outer second plate 532 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the bulging portion 531b of the outer first plate 531, and the rear end opening of the storage recess 531c in which the magnet 535 is housed is closed by the outer second plate 532. At the same time, the outer second plate 532 is attached to the outer first plate 531 using a machine screw (not shown).

In this state, the roller 536 is fitted to the boss portion 531e protruding from the front surface of the outer first plate 531, and then the screw 537 is screwed into the front surface of the boss portion 531e from the front to form the outer first plate 531. A roller 536 is rotatably attached to the front side. Further, after fitting the roller 536 to the tip (rear end) of the connecting pin 535 protruding rearward from the mounting hole 532a of the outer second plate 532, the screw 537 is screwed from the rear to the tip surface of the connecting pin 535. By inserting the roller 536, the roller 536 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the outer second plate 532.

After that, the drive shaft 539 is inserted (press-fitted) into the bearing hole 531f of the outer first plate 531 which is open to the front surface on the most proximal side of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R, respectively. As a result, the assembly of the advance / retreat unit 530 is completed.

In the advancing / retreating unit 530, the outer first plate 531 and the outer second plate 532, the inner first plate 533, the inner second plate 534, the connecting pin 535, and the roller 536 are each made of synthetic resin. As a result, the magnetic force of the magnet 538 stored in the storage recess 531c of the outer first plate 531 and the storage recess 533d of the inner first plate 533 is applied to the outside of the outer first plate 531 and the inner first plate 533, respectively. Can be done. Further, the outer first plate 531 and the connecting pin 535 are integrally formed.

In the assembled state of the advancing / retreating unit 530, as shown in FIG. 30, the magnet 538 is arranged (stored) near the lower side of each of the storage recesses 531c of the outer first plate 531 and the storage recess 533d of the inner first plate 533. ) Has been.

Further, in the assembled state of the advancing / retreating unit 530, the regulating protrusion 531d of the outer first plate 531 is located in the regulating recess 533b of the inner first plate 533. The relationship between the regulation protrusion 531d and the regulation recess 533b is that when the outer first plate 531 and the inner first plate 533 extend linearly, the regulation protrusion 531d has one end (magnet 538) of the regulation recess 533b. There is a space in which the regulation protrusion 531d can rotate about 60 degrees between the regulation protrusion 531d and the end on the opposite side of the regulation recess 533b. It is formed. Therefore, the advancing / retreating unit 530 cannot bend from the state of being linearly extended by the regulating protrusion 531d and the regulating recess 533b to the lower side where the magnet 538 is arranged, and each connecting pin 535 is moved to the upper side. Can be bent at an angle of about 60 degrees. That is, it is formed so as to bend only to the upper side.

When the lower sides of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are brought close to each other in the advancing / retreating unit 530, the magnets 538 provided in each of the advancing / retreating units 530 are attracted to each other, and the magnets 538 are brought into close contact with each other by magnetic force. Then, due to the relationship between the regulation protrusion 531d and the regulation recess 533b described above, the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R, which are in close contact with each other, are maintained in a straightly extended state without bending within the range of the magnetic force of the magnet 538. To.

Further, in the advancing / retreating unit 530, a plurality of rollers 536 attached to the outer sides of the outer first plate 531 and the outer second plate 532 are guided by the guiding portion 513 of the base unit 510.

Further, in the advance / retreat unit 530, the drive shaft 539 of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R penetrates the slit 514 of the front base 511 in the base unit 510 from the rear side and projects forward. Further, the mounting boss 535a of the left unit 530R penetrates the slit 514 of the rear base 512 in the base unit 510 from the front side and protrudes rearward.

Further, the advancing / retreating unit 530 is provided in the gap between the locking piece 531a of the outer first plate 531 and the holding portion 532b of the outer second plate 532 and the gap between the pair of locking pieces 534b of the inner second plate 534. By inserting the wiring member 525 made of a flat cable, the wiring member 525 can be held along the advancing / retreating unit 530 (left unit 530L and right unit 530R) (see FIG. 27).

More specifically, in the advancing / retreating unit 530, in the coma composed of the outer first plate 531 and the outer second plate 532, the lower side of the locking piece 531a protruding rearward from the front outer first plate 531 is inside. In the coma composed of the first plate 533 and the inner second plate 534, the wiring member 525 is held so as to pass under the locking piece 534b protruding forward from the inner second plate 534 on the rear side. There is. That is, by holding the wiring member 525 against the locking pieces 531a and 534b alternately extending from the front-rear direction for each frame connected in a band shape, the advancing / retreating unit 530 bends (the connecting pin 535 extends). Not only can it prevent the wiring member 525 from coming off in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which it is located), but it can also prevent the wiring member 525 from coming off in the direction in which the connecting pin 535 extends (in the front-back direction). The wiring member 525 can be held in a better condition with respect to the unit 530.

Further, in the coma composed of the outer first plate 531 and the outer second plate 532, a wiring member 525 is provided between one locking piece 531a of the outer first plate 531 and the sandwiching portion 532b of the outer second plate 532. In addition to holding the wiring member 525, the wiring member 525 is held between a pair of locking pieces 534b separated above and below the inner second plate 534 in the coma composed of the inner first plate 533 and the inner second plate 534. It is possible to reliably prevent the wiring member 525 from moving in and out of the advancing / retreating unit 530.

Further, with respect to the strip-shaped and flexible advancing / retreating unit 530, the wiring member 525 is provided with the locking pieces 531a of the plurality of first outer plates 531, the holding portion 532b of the second outer plate 532, and the inner second plate 534. Since it is held by the locking piece 534b and extends along the advancing / retreating unit 530, it is possible to prevent the wiring member 525 held by the advancing / retreating unit 530 from bending, and it is possible to prevent the wiring member 525 from being broken due to bending. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the central movable decorative body 553 from being unable to drive the effect due to the disconnection of the wiring member 525, which causes discomfort to the player, and the effect by the central movable decorative body 533 can be prevented. It is possible to surely entertain and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

[5-5c. Central movable decoration unit]
The centrally movable decorative body unit 550 of the centrally movable effect unit 500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. The central movable decorative unit 550 is attached to the tip of the advancing / retreating unit 530 (left unit 530L and right unit 530R). The central movable decorative body unit 550 includes a connecting base 551 that rotatably connects the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R of the advancing / retreating unit 530, and a decorative body base 552 that is attached to the front surface of the connecting base 551. The central movable decorative body 553 rotatably attached to the front surface of the body base 552, the central rotary drive motor 554 attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base 552, and the central rotary drive motor 554 attached to the rotary shaft. A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown), a driven gear that meshes with the drive gear and rotates integrally with the central movable decoration (not shown), and a decorative base 552 and a central movable decorative body 553. It is equipped with a centrally movable decorative body decorative substrate (not shown), which is attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 552 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The connection base 551 of the central movable decorative unit 550 has a pair of connection holes 551a formed at the lower end thereof, which penetrate the front and rear and are separated from each other to the left and right. The connecting pin 535 on the most distal end side of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R in the advancing / retreating unit 530 is inserted into the connecting hole 551a of the connecting base 551. With this pair of connecting holes 551a, the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R can be connected to each other.

The central movable decorative body 553 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in the shape of a short bottomed cylinder with the front side as the bottom. The central movable decorative body 553 is attached to the decorative body base 552 so as to rotate about the center of the front surface formed in a circle. The central movable decorative body 553 has translucency.

The central rotation drive motor 554 and the central movable decorative body decorative substrate are connected to the central right decorative substrate 522 via a wiring member 525 made of a flexible flat cable.

The central movable decorative body unit 550 can rotate the central movable decorative body 555 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by rotationally driving the central rotary drive motor 554. Further, the central movable decorative body unit 550 can make the central movable decorative body 553 emit light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the central movable decorative body decorative substrate.

In the assembled state of the central movable decorative body unit 550, the central movable decorative body 553 rotated by the central rotary drive motor 554 is located in front of the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 (left unit 530L and right unit 530R). There is.

[5-5d. Advance / retreat drive mechanism]
The advance / retreat drive mechanism 570 of the central movable effect unit 500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. The advance / retreat drive mechanism 570 is a mechanism for driving the advance / retreat unit 530 to raise and lower the central movable decorative body unit 550. The advance / retreat drive mechanism 570 includes a central elevating drive motor 571 and a rotation of the central elevating drive motor 571, which are attached to the rear surface of the front base 511 in the base unit 510 so that the rotation shaft projects between the front base 511 and the base cover 520. The drive gear 572 mounted on the shaft, the transmission gear 573 meshed with the drive gear 572 and rotatably mounted on the front surface of the front base 511, and the front surface of the front base 511 meshed with the transmission gear 573. It is equipped with an actuating gear 574, which is rotatably attached to.

Further, the advancing / retreating drive mechanism 570 engages with the operating gear 574 from below and slides in the left-right direction, and the lower slider 575 that moves the drive shaft 539 of the left unit 530L of the advancing / retreating unit 530 in the left-right direction and the operating gear 574. The upper slider 576 that meshes from the upper side and slides in the left-right direction and moves the drive shaft 539 of the right unit 530R of the advance / retreat unit 530 in the left-right direction, and the upper slider 576 that is attached to the front base 511 and detects the slide position of the upper slider 576. It is equipped with an elevating detection sensor 577. The lower slider 575 and the upper slider 576 are mounted between the front base 511 and the base cover 520 in the base unit 510.

The lower slider 575 is formed on the upper surface of the lower main body 575a, which is lower than the working gear 574 and is slidably attached to the front surface of the front base 511 in the left-right direction, and meshes with the working gear 574 from below. The lower rack gear 575b extending to the left and right, the flat plate-shaped extension piece 575c extending upward from the left end of the front view of the lower body 575a, and the extension piece 575c penetrating back and forth to the left in the advance / retreat unit 530. It is provided with a drive hole 575d into which the drive shaft 539 of the unit 350L is inserted. The lower main body 575a of the lower slider 575 is slidably supported in the left-right direction by the lower guide groove 515 in the front base 511.

The upper slider 576 is formed on the lower surface of the upper main body 576a, which is above the working gear 574 and is slidably attached to the front surface of the front base 511 in the left-right direction, and meshes with the working gear 574 from above. The upper rack gear 576b extending to the left and right, the flat plate-shaped extension piece 576c extending downward from the right end of the front view of the upper body 576a, and the right unit in the advance / retreat unit 530 penetrating the extension piece 576c back and forth. It is provided with a drive hole 576d into which the drive shaft 539 of the 350R is inserted, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 576e extending upward from the right end of the upper main body 576a in the front view and can be detected by the elevating detection sensor 577. The upper main body 576a of the upper slider 576 is slidably supported in the left-right direction by the upper guide groove 515 in the front base 511.

In the normal state (the state where the central movable decorative unit 550 is located at the descending end), the advancing / retreating drive mechanism 570 has a drive hole 575d of the lower slider 575 and a drive hole 576d of the upper slider 576 as a front view base unit. It is located near the left end and near the right end of 510, respectively, and is in the state of being most separated from each other. In this state, when the operating gear 574 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the central elevating drive motor 571, the lower slider 575 can be slid to the right and the upper slider 576 can be slid to the left at the same speed.

[5-5e. Lifting support mechanism]
The elevating support mechanism 590 of the central movable effect unit 500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. The elevating support mechanism 590 is attached to the rear side of the base unit 511 (rear base 512) and is a mechanism for supporting the elevating of the central movable decorative body unit 550. The elevating support mechanism 590 is between the flat plate-shaped first elevating guide 591 and the first elevating guide 591 and the rear base 512, which are slidably supported in the vertical direction in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the rear base 512. The second elevating guide 592, which is slidably supported in the vertical direction by the first elevating guide 591 and whose upper end is attached to the connecting base 551 of the central movable decorative unit 550, and one of the rear surfaces of the first elevating guide 591. It is provided with a guide cover 593 that supports the portion and is attached to the rear base 512.

The first elevating guide 591 is slidably attached up and down only in a direction protruding upward from the upper end of the rear base 512. The second elevating guide 592 is slidably attached up and down only in a direction protruding upward from the upper end of the first elevating guide 591. In the first elevating guide 591 and the second elevating guide 592 of the elevating support mechanism 590, the connection base 551 of the central movable decorative unit 550 attached to the upper end of the second elevating guide 592 does not bend in the left-right direction in the front view. We are assisting you to go up and down straight.

Further, the elevating support mechanism 590 is attached to a pair of guide bushes 595 which are rotatably separated from each other to the left and right on the right side of the rear surface of the rear base 512 in the left-right direction in the front view, and one end thereof is attached to the rear base 512. The other end of the opposite side is attached to the rear end of the mounting boss 535a of the right unit 530R in the advancing / retreating unit 530, and the stretchable string-shaped assist elastic body 596 wound around the pair of guide bushes. And have. The assist elastic body 596 is a long coil spring, and the other end thereof is attached to the attachment boss 535a by a screw 597. The mounting boss 535a slidably penetrates the inside of the slit 514 of the rear base 512 via the bush 598.

The pair of guide bushes 595 of the elevating support mechanism 590 are attached to each of the portions corresponding to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the slit 514 extending to the left and right in the right portion of the rear base 512 when viewed from the front. Then, the assist elastic body 596 is attached to the rear base 512 on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the rear base 512 with one end between the pair of guide bushes 595, and then attached to the vicinity of the end portion of the rear base 512. After being wound around the guide bush 595 from the lower side, it is folded back toward the center side of the rear base 512, and is wound around the guide bush 595 on the side closer to the center from the upper side to the rear end of the mounting boss 535a. The other end is attached.

The assist elastic body 596 is wound around a pair of guide bushes 595 in an extended state, and both ends are attached to a rear base 512 and a mounting boss 535a, respectively. As a result, the assist elastic body 596 is always urged to the left in the front view with respect to the mounting boss 535a of the right unit 530R in the advancing / retreating unit 530. That is, the assist elastic body 596 supports (assists) the ascent of the central movable decorative body unit 550.

[5-5f. Operation of the central movable production unit]
Next, the operation of the central movable effect unit 500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33. In the normal state, the central movable effect unit 500 is based on the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R of the advancing / retreating unit 530, which are arranged symmetrically with the center in the left-right direction as a boundary, as shown in FIG. 31 (a). It is housed in the unit 510 (between the front base 511 and the rear base 512). In this state, the base ends of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R (the left end of the left unit 530L and the right end of the right unit 530R in front view) are located near the left and right ends of the base unit 510, and are on the left. The tips of the unit 530L and the right unit 530R are located substantially in the center of the base unit 510.

More specifically, the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R in the advancing / retreating unit 530 are entirely located on the guiding portion 513 of the base unit 510, and all the rollers 536 of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are connected to the guiding portion 513. It is in contact. More specifically, one piece composed of a set of the outer first plate 531 and the outer second plate 532 on the most advanced side in the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R is the first standing of the guiding portion 513. It is located at the upper portion 513b, and the remaining four pieces of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are located at the horizontal portion 513a of the guiding portion 513.

In this normal state, the central movable decorative unit 550 attached so as to connect the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R is in the position of the most lowered descending end, and is centrally movable. The decorative body 553 is located directly in front of the base cover 520 of the base unit 510. That is, the central movable decorative body unit 550 is in a state in which it does not protrude (rise) upward from the base unit 510.

Further, in the normal state, since the base ends of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are located near the left and right ends of the base unit 510, the drive shafts of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R respectively. Due to the drive hole 575d of the lower slider 575 and the drive hole 576d of the upper slider 576 into which the 539 is inserted, the lower slider 575 and the upper slider 576 are moved to the left and right in the left-right direction by the guide groove 515 of the base unit 510. They are located at the moving ends of each side. Further, in the normal state, the detection piece 576e of the upper slider 576 is detected by the elevating detection sensor 577.

Further, under normal conditions, the first elevating guide 591 and the second elevating guide 592 of the elevating support mechanism 590 are located directly behind the rear base 512 in the base unit 510 (see FIG. 23 (b)). Further, in a normal state, the assist elastic body 596 of the elevating support mechanism 590 is urged so that the right unit 530L moves to the left in the front view via the mounting boss 535a of the right unit 530L.

In this normal state, when the central elevating drive motor 571 is rotationally driven by the central elevating drive motor 571 so that the actuating gear 574 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the drive gear 572 and the transmission gear 573, the actuating gear 574 meshes with the actuating gear 574 from below. The lower rack gear 575b slides the lower slider 575 to the right in the front view, and the upper rack gear 576b meshing with the operating gear 574 from above slides the upper slider 576 to the left in the front view. The lower slider 575 and the upper slider 576 slide in opposite directions at the same speed.

By sliding the lower slider 575 and the upper slider 576 to the right and left, respectively, the drive shaft 539 and the left unit 530L of the left unit 530L inserted into the drive hole 575d of the lower slider 575 and the drive hole 576d of the upper slider 576, respectively. The drive shaft 539 of the right unit 530R presses the base end of the left unit 530L to the right in the front view and the base end of the right unit 530R to the left in the front view. That is, the base ends of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are pressed toward the center side in the left-right direction of the base unit 510.

When the base ends of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are pressed toward the center, the roller 536 located at the tip of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R is moved to the second rising portion 513c of the guiding portion 513. The central movable decorative unit 550 starts to rise via the connecting base 551 connecting the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R to each other. Will be. Although not shown, the second elevating guide 592 attached to the rear surface of the connecting base 551 is guided to the first elevating guide 591 by raising the central movable decorative unit 550. It extends upward from the upper end of the elevating guide 591 and assists the central movable decorative unit 550 to ascend straight without bending in the left-right direction in the front view.

Then, when the base ends of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are pressed toward the center and the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R move upward, the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are two to the tip. The second roller 536 rolls the first rising portion 513b of the guide portion 513 toward the center side, respectively, so that the most tip-side pieces of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are close to each other on the lower sides. Will rise to. As a result, the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R (central movable decorative unit 550) move further upward. At this time, since the base ends of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R have moved to the center side, the second piece from the tip of each is located at the first rising portion 513b of the guiding portion 513. ing.

When the lower sides of the topmost pieces of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R approach each other, they are attracted to each other by the magnetic force of the magnets 538 provided in each, and the roller 536 on the base end side of the pieces guides them. When the portion 513 is separated upward from the second rising portion 513c, the pieces on the most advanced side of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R come into contact with each other and come into close contact with each other due to the magnetic force of the magnet 538. The pieces at the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are brought into close contact with each other by the magnetic force of the magnet 538, so that the rigidity of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R is increased, and the central movable decorative unit 550 attached to the tip is dropped. You can support it without letting it go.

The base ends of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R move toward the center, so that each piece constituting the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R becomes the first rising portion 513b and the first rising portion 513 of the guiding portion 513. Induced to move upward in sequence by the upper part 513c, the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R project upward through the opening 510a of the base unit 510, and the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R. The central movable decorative unit 550 attached to the tip will be further raised.

The pieces of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R guided upward by the guiding portion 513 of the base unit 510 are brought into close contact with each other so that their lower sides are in contact with each other due to the magnetic force of the magnet 538 attached to each piece. The frames are in a state of extending straight upward. In this state, between the pieces arranged one above the other, the regulation protrusion 531d of the outer first plate 531 constituting one of the frames is in the regulation recess 533b of the inner first plate 533 constituting the other. It is in contact with the end portion on the lower side, and is prevented from bending toward the lower side (center side in the left-right direction of the base unit 510) around the connecting pin 535 connecting the pieces. Therefore, the regulation protrusion 531d and the regulation recess 533b also assist the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R so that the portions protruding upward from the base unit 510 extend straight upward without bending in the left-right direction in the front view.

Then, when the rollers 536 at the base ends of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R reach the vicinity of the end near the center of the horizontal portion 513a of the guide portion 513, the drive of the central elevating drive motor 571 is stopped and the left unit The movement of the 530L and the right unit 530R stops. In this state, only the tops on the most proximal side of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are located and guided at the guidance portion 513 (first rising portion 513b), and the remaining four tops stand in the vertical direction. It is in a climbed state (see FIG. 32). That is, the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are in the state of protruding most upward from the base unit 510, and the central movable decorative unit 550 attached to the tips thereof is the most raised rising end. Is located in.

When the central movable decorative unit 550 is positioned at the rising end, the lower slider 575 and the upper slider 576 are located at the right and left moving ends, respectively. Further, in the state where the central movable decorative body unit 550 is positioned at the rising end, the central movable decorative body unit 550 protrudes upward higher than the vertical dimension of the base unit 510 (base cover 520). In this state, the central movable decorative unit 550 is located substantially in the center of the front surface of the main liquid crystal display device 450 (see FIG. 41).

In order to return the central movable decorative unit 550 from the position of the ascending end to the position of the normal descending end, the operating gear 574 is rotationally driven by the central elevating drive motor 571 in the counterclockwise direction of the front view opposite to the above. Then, the central movable decorative unit 550 can be returned to the normal state position by performing the operation opposite to the above. At this time, the pair of second rising portions 513c of the guiding portion 513 exerts the action of a wedge with respect to the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R which are in close contact with each other due to the magnetic force of the magnet 538, and the left unit is in close contact with the left unit 530L. The frames of the 530L and the right unit 530R can be smoothly separated from each other.

The central movable effect unit 500 of the present embodiment can stop the central movable decorative unit 550 at any position between the descending end and the ascending end by appropriately controlling the central elevating drive motor 571. Further, the central movable effect unit 500 is centrally movable by the drive of the central rotation drive motor 554 regardless of whether the central movable decorative unit 550 is at the descending end position, the ascending end position, or between the descending end and the ascending end. The decorative body 553 can be rotated. Further, the central movable effect unit 500 can illuminate the base cover 520 by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the central left decorative substrate 521 and the central right decorative substrate 523, and the central movable decorative unit 550 is not shown in the center. The central movable decoration body 553 can be light-emittingly decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the movable decoration body decoration substrate.

As described above, according to the centrally movable effect unit 500 of the present embodiment, the centrally movable decorative body unit 550 can be raised higher than the vertical dimension of the base unit 510, which makes the player wonder. It can give a strong impact and attract the player's attention to the central movable decorative body 550.

Further, since the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R, each of which is composed of a chain and has a strip shape and flexibility, are brought into close contact with each other by the magnetic force of the magnet 538, the rigidity is higher than that of the left unit 530L, the right unit 530R, and the single unit. The central movable decorative unit 550 can be sufficiently supported by the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R which are raised and are in close contact with each other, and the central movable decorative unit 550 can be projected (raised) from the base unit 510 without any problem. ..

Further, since the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are rotatably attached to the connection base 551 of the central movable decorative unit 550, the tips of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are connected to each other. By rotating (rotating) relative to the base 551, the extending direction of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R can be changed in various ways from the central movable decorative unit 550. Therefore, when the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are retracted by the advancing / retreating drive mechanism 570, the direction in which the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are as orthogonal as possible to the direction in which the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R project outward from the base unit 510 ( Since the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R can be extended from the connecting base 551 of the central movable decorative unit unit 550 (in a direction parallel to the long side of the base unit 510), the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R can be used. The central movable decorative unit 550 can be retracted to the base unit 510 as much as possible, and the advance / retreat drive mechanism 570 increases the distance from the most retracted position to the most advanced position of the central movable decorative unit 550. It can be lengthened, and the central movable decorative unit 550 can be moved more greatly.

[5-5 g. Second embodiment of the central movable production unit]
Next, the central movable effect unit 500A having a different configuration from the central movable effect unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a front view schematically showing a second embodiment of the central movable effect unit. Although not shown in the central movable effect unit 500A, the regulation protrusion 531d of the outer first plate 531 and the regulation recess 533b of the inner first plate 533 are omitted in the advance / retreat unit 530. Further, the advance / retreat drive mechanism 570 is configured so that the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R of the advance / retreat unit 530 can be driven separately.

When the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are moved to the center side at the same speed in the central movable effect unit 500A, the central movable decorative unit 550 is moved straight up and down in the same manner as the central movable effect unit 500. be able to.

Further, in the central movable effect unit 500A, for example, when the central movable decorative body unit 550 is raised from the position of the descending end, if the right unit 530R is moved to the center side earlier than the left unit 530L, the central movable decorative unit 500A is more than the left unit 530L. The right unit 530R protrudes (is extended) more outward from the opening 510a of the base unit 510, and the left unit is due to the magnetic force of the magnet 538 provided in each frame of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R. The lower sides of the 530L and the right unit 530R are attracted to each other and come into contact with each other, and the advancing / retreating unit 530 extends outward from the base unit 510 with the left unit 530L side as the inside and the advancing / retreating unit 530 bent in an arc. (See FIG. 33). That is, the central movable decorative unit 550 can be moved up and down (advanced and retreated) so as to draw an arc to the left side of the center of the front view.

At this time, since the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are brought into close contact with each other by the magnetic force of the magnet 538, the lower side of the left unit 530L and the lower side of the right unit 530R are partially in contact with each other and are in total contact with each other. Even if it is not, it can be brought into close contact with each other, and the rigidity of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R can be increased to sufficiently support the central movable decorative body unit 550.

On the other hand, although not shown, when the centrally movable decorative unit 550 is raised from the position of the descending end, conversely to the above, if the left unit 530L is moved to the center side earlier than the right unit 530R, the center is movable. The decorative unit 550 can be moved up and down in an arc to the right of the center of the front view.

Further, although not shown, by moving the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R to the center side at the same speed at the same time, the central movable decorative unit 550 is raised straight and positioned at the rising end. When only the left unit 530L or the right unit 530R is retracted to the base unit 510 side (base end side), the lower sides that are in contact with each other slide with each other, and the central movable decorative body unit is moved from the retracted base unit 510. Since the length up to 550 is shortened, the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R, which are in close contact with each other, bend with the retracted side as the inside, and the central movable decorative unit unit swings its head in one of the left and right directions. The 550 can be moved. At this time, since the lower sides of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are in close contact with each other due to the magnetic force of the magnet 538, when only one of them is retracted, the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are in contact with each other. It can slide between the lower sides and can easily bend to one side in the left-right direction.

As described above, according to the central movable effect unit 500A, the moving speed (feeding speed) and moving direction (feeding direction) of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R of the advancing / retreating unit 530 by the advancing / retreating drive mechanism 570 can be appropriately selected. Since the centrally movable decorative body unit 550 protruding upward from the base unit 510 can be moved in various directions, the centrally movable decorative body unit 550 can be made to perform various movements, which further entertains the player. At the same time, it is possible to make the player less bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are brought into close contact with each other by the magnetic force of the magnet 538, when the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are brought close to each other, they are attracted to each other even if they are not in contact with each other. It can be brought into close contact with each other. Further, since the magnets are brought into close contact with each other by the magnetic force of the magnet 538, the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are relative to each other in the direction along the surface in contact with each other, as compared with the case where the magnets are brought into close contact with each other by a hook-and-loop fastener or an adhesive material. When the feed speeds of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R are made different by the advance / retreat drive mechanism 570, the pair of left unit 530L and the right unit 530R protruding outward from the base unit 510 are It is possible to make it easier to bend with the side with the slower feed rate as the inside. Therefore, as described above, by appropriately selecting the feed speeds of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R by the advance / retreat drive mechanism 570, the moving directions of the central movable decorative unit 550 protruding outward from the base unit 510 can be varied. Since the central movable decorative unit 550 can be made to move in various ways, it is possible to entertain the player more and to make the player less bored, which reduces the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

[5-6. Overall configuration of the upper movable production unit]
Subsequently, the upper movable effect unit 600 of the middle unit 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39. FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the upper movable effect unit in the middle unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 35 is a perspective view of the upper movable effect unit as viewed from the back, and FIG. 36 is an upper lateral movable effect unit in the upper movable effect unit. It is a front view of the upper movable production unit which shows the movement of. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view showing the upper-middle movable effect unit in the upper movable effect unit in a schematic configuration. FIG. 38 (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the upper-middle movable effect unit in the retracted state from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) shows the upper-middle movable effect unit in the state of appearing halfway from the state of (a) from the front. It is an explanatory diagram shown by, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the upper-middle movable effect unit in the appearance state substantially from the front. Further, FIG. 39 shows a state in which the upper-middle movable decorative body of the upper-horizontal movable effect unit is moved to the center side and the upper-middle movable decorative body of the upper-middle movable effect unit is moved to the appearance position. It is a front view.

The upper movable effect unit 600 of the present embodiment is attached from the rear side to a portion of the middle unit base 400 surrounded by a pair of side portions 401, an upper connecting portion 402, and a middle connecting portion 403. The upper movable effect unit 600 is on the upper front surface of the front view frame-shaped unit base 601 attached to the middle unit base 400, the upper lateral movable effect unit 610 attached to the unit base 601 and the upper lateral movable effect unit 610. It is equipped with an attached upper-middle movable effect unit 650.

The upper-horizontal movable effect unit 610 includes a pair of upper-horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 that are arranged within the frame of the unit base 601 in the front view and are always visible from the player side. The pair of upper and lateral movable decorative bodies 612 are movable in the left-right direction between the left and right ends in the frame of the unit base 601 and the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. Further, the upper-middle movable effect unit 600 is arranged outside the frame of the unit base 601 (above the inside of the frame) in the normal state, and is a pair of semi-circular ring-shaped upper middle left decorations that cannot be seen from the player side. It is equipped with a body 661 and an upper middle right decorative body 671. The pair of upper middle left decorative bodies 661 and upper middle right decorative bodies 671 move into the front view frame of the unit base 601 according to the gaming state, are united into one large ring, and are visible from the player side. Will be.

The unit base 601 of the upper movable effect unit 600 has a front view shape formed into a square frame extending to the left and right. The unit base 601 is formed in a strip shape in which both the left and right sides extend vertically with a predetermined width in the front-rear direction, and the upper side is formed in a flat plate shape extending rearward from the rear ends of both the left and right sides. At the same time, the lower side is formed in a flat plate shape extending forward from the front ends on both the left and right sides. The unit base 601 is formed with a pair of groove-shaped lower guides 602 extending from both left and right ends toward the center and opening upward in the vicinity of the rear end on the upper surface of the lower side. The lower guide 602 slidably guides the lower guide pin 612a of the pair of upper lateral movable decorative bodies 612 in the upper lateral movable effect unit 610 described later.

[5-6a. Upper and horizontal movable production unit]
The upper lateral movable effect unit 610 of the upper movable effect unit 600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. The upper-horizontal movable effect unit 610 is suspended in the left-right direction while being separated from each other in the left-right direction near the front end of the upper-horizontal base 611 attached to the upper surface of the upper side of the unit base 601 and the upper-horizontal base 611. It supports a pair of vertically movable decorative bodies 612 and a part of the upper end of the pair of upward and horizontal movable decorative bodies 612, and can slide in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the upper and horizontal base 611. A pair of sliders (not shown) attached to each, a pair of top-lateral drive motors (not shown) that are attached to each pair of sliders and move the sliders in the left-right direction, and a pair of top-lateral drives. It includes an upper cover 615 attached to the upper side of the upper horizontal base 611 so as to cover the motor and the slider from above.

Although not shown, the upper-horizontal base 611 penetrates vertically and extends to the left and right near the front end and near the left and right ends, and the upper-horizontal movable decorative body 612 can rotate around an axis extending vertically. A pair of guide slits for hanging so that they can be moved in the left-right direction, a guide slit that penetrates up and down behind the pair of guide slits and extends straight in the left-right direction, and a guide slit formed behind the guide slits. It is equipped with a pair of rack gears that extend to the left and right.

The guide slit is bent forward so that the end on the side closer to the left and right ends of the upper horizontal base 611 is closer to the end and away from the guide slit, and the end on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction of the upper horizontal base 611. The part is farther from the center than the guide slit. The guide slit of the upper lateral base 611 is inserted so that the drive pin extending upward from the upper lateral movable decorative body 612 projects upward.

The surface of the pair of upper and lateral movable decorative bodies 612 is three-dimensionally formed at a height substantially the same as the height inside the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 601 and has translucency. Although not shown, the upper horizontal movable decorative body 612 has an upper horizontal decorative substrate arranged inside and mounted with a plurality of LEDs, and slides downward from the lower end into the lower guide 602 of the unit base 601. A lower guide pin 612a (see FIG. 36) that is possibly inserted, a hanging portion that projects upward from the upper end and is slidably and rotatably suspended in the guide slit of the upper horizontal base 611, and a hanging portion. It is provided with a drive pin that protrudes upward from a position different from the above and is inserted into the guide slit of the upper lateral base 611.

Although not shown, the upper-horizontal movable decorative body 612 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately causing the LED of the upper-horizontal decorative substrate to emit light. The drive pin of the upper-horizontal movable decorative body 612 is rotatably attached to a slider that is slidably attached to the upper surface of the upper-horizontal base 611 in the left-right direction.

Although not shown, the upper lateral drive motor is attached to the upper surface of the slider, and a drive gear that meshes with the rack gear of the upper lateral base 611 is attached to a rotating shaft penetrating the slider. As a result, when the drive gear is rotationally driven by the upper lateral drive motor, the slider slides in the left-right direction.

Next, the operation of the upper-horizontal movable effect unit 600 will be described. In the normal state, the pair of the upper-horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 are located at the most distant positions in the left-right direction, and the upper-horizontal movable effect unit 600 is located near both the left and right sides of the unit base 601. (See FIG. 36 and the like). In this normal state, in the state of being assembled in the middle unit 5, a pair of upper and horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 are located at the left and right ends of the main liquid crystal display device 450, respectively, in front view, and both the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display device 450. Is decorating.

In this normal state, the hanging portion and the drive pin of the upper-horizontal movable decoration body 612 are positioned so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction by the guide slit and the guide slit of the upper-horizontal base 611. The front surface of the body 612 is tilted about 63 degrees with respect to the front surface. That is, in a normal state, the left and right upper and lateral movable decorative bodies 612 are inclined so that their front surfaces face the center of the frame of the unit base 601.

Under normal conditions, when the left and right sliders are slid toward the center in the left-right direction of the upper-horizontal base 611 by driving a pair of upper-horizontal drive motors (not shown), the upper-horizontal movable decorative body 612 supported by the respective sliders The drive pin moves to the center side in the left-right direction along the guide slit of the upper horizontal base 611, and as the drive pin moves, the hanging portion of the upper horizontal movable decorative body 612 also becomes the guide slit of the upper horizontal base 611. It will move to the center side in the left-right direction along the line. At this time, since the guide slit of the upper lateral base 611 is formed so as to bend backward in an arc shape so as to approach the guide slit toward the center side and then extend in parallel with the guide slit, it can be moved upward and laterally. The hanging portion of the decorative body 612 and the drive pin are relatively separated from each other in the left-right direction and approached in the front-rear direction, so that the upper and lateral movable decorative body 612 rotates around the hanging portion. As a result, the upper lateral movable decorative body 612 moves toward the center side of the upper lateral base 611 while rotating so that the front surface faces the front.

Then, when the pair of sliders reaches the moving end toward the center in the left-right direction, the driving of the pair of upper lateral drive motors is stopped, and the movement of the pair of sliders is stopped. In this state, the pair of upper and lateral movable decorative bodies 612 are located at close positions separated from each other so that the front surface thereof faces directly in front and the inside of the frame of the unit base 601 is divided into three in the left-right direction. (See FIG. 39). Further, in a state where the pair of upward / horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 is moved to the center side, the pair of upward / horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 are located in front of the main liquid crystal display device 450.

[5-6b. Upper and middle movable production unit]
Next, the upper-middle movable effect unit 650 of the upper movable effect unit 600 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 38. The upper-middle movable effect unit 650 is attached to the front surface above the pair of upper-lateral movable decorative bodies 612 in the upper-horizontal movable effect unit 610. The upper-middle movable effect unit 650 includes an upper-middle base 651 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper-middle movable effect unit 610, and a front cover 652 attached to the front surface of the upper-middle movable effect unit 651 and decorated on the front surface. It is equipped with.

Further, the upper-middle movable effect unit 650 is rotatably attached between the front cover 652 and the upper-middle base 651 so as to have a rotation center on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper-middle base 651. An annular upper-middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 and a semi-annular upper-middle right movable decoration rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper-middle base 651 so as to have a rotation center on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The body unit 670 and the upper middle base 651 are slidably attached up and down at the center in the left-right direction, and transmit the rotation of the upper middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 to rotate the upper middle right movable decorative unit 670. It is provided with a transmission slider 680 to be made to move, and a rotation drive mechanism 690 which is attached to the upper middle base 651 and rotates the upper middle left movable decorative unit unit 660.

The upper middle base 651 of the upper middle movable effect unit 650 is formed into a substantially quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The upper middle base 651 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape as a whole, and the part on the right side is located in front of the part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and the right end of the left side part and the left end of the right side part. Are formed in a plane-viewing crank shape in which the above are connected. The upper middle left decorative body unit 660 is placed in front of the upper middle left movable decoration unit 660 in front of the part on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the upper middle base 651, and the upper middle right movable decoration is placed behind the part on the right side from the center. The upper middle right decorative body 671 of the body unit 670 is arranged. Further, by the upper middle base 651, the upper middle left decorative body 661 of the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 of the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 are positioned at the same position in the front-rear direction. Be placed.

The upper-middle base 651 protrudes forward from the front of the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and has a left shaft portion 651a for rotatably mounting the upper-middle-left movable decorative unit unit 660 and a left-right direction in the front view. The right shaft portion 651b, which protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the part on the left side of the center and is used to rotatably attach the upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670, and the upper and lower parts near the left end of the part on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the front view. It is provided with a guide groove (not shown) for slidably mounting the transmission slider 680 up and down. The left shaft portion 651a and the right shaft portion 651b of the upper middle base 651 are provided at symmetrical positions with the center of the upper middle base 651 in the left-right direction as a boundary.

The upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 is a semicircular ring-shaped upper middle left decorative body 661 having a translucent front surface and a left decorative body to which the upper middle left decorative body 661 is attached from the rear side. It is equipped with a body base 662, an upper middle left decorative board (not shown) mounted between the left decorative base 662 and the upper middle left decorative body 661 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. There is. The upper middle left decorative body 661 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately causing the LED of the upper middle left decorative substrate to emit light. The semicircular upper middle left decorative body 661 is formed so that the radius on the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the radius of the central movable decorative body 553 in the central movable effect unit 500, and the radius on the outer peripheral side is a frame-shaped unit base. It is formed to be slightly smaller than the height in the frame in 601.

The left decorative body base 662 has a semicircular ring-shaped decorative body mounting portion 662a to which the upper middle left decorative body 661 is attached to the front surface, and a flat plate shape extending outward from one end of the decorative body mounting portion 662a. The substrate portion 662b, the rotary bearing portion 662c rotatably attached to the left shaft portion 651a of the upper middle base 651 at the tip of the substrate portion 662b, and the rotary bearing portion 662c and the decorative body mounting portion 662a in the substrate portion 662b. A long hole-shaped left transmission slit 662d penetrating back and forth between the two, and a position separated from the rotary bearing portion 662c of the substrate portion 662b in a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction of the left transmission slit 662d and penetrating back and forth. The working bearing portion 662e and the flat plate-shaped detection piece 662f extending from the working bearing portion 662e in the direction opposite to the rotary bearing portion 662c are provided.

In the left decorative body base 662, at one end of the semicircular decorative body mounting portion 662a, the substrate portion 662b extends in a direction away from the center of the semicircular ring on the side opposite to the arc side. In the substrate portion 662b of the left decorative body base 662, the portion extending from the decorative body mounting portion 662a extends forward once and then extends in parallel with the front surface of the decorative body mounting portion 662a, and has a plan view shape. It is formed in a crank shape. The left transmission pin 681 of the transmission slider 680 is slidably inserted into the left transmission slit 662d of the left decorative body base 662. The action pin 694b of the link rod 694 in the rotation transmission mechanism 690 is rotatably inserted into the action bearing portion 662e of the left decorative body base 662. Further, the detection piece 662f of the left decorative body base 662 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 653 attached to the upper middle base 651.

In the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660, the upper middle left decorative body 661 and the decorative body mounting portion 662a of the left decorative body base 662 are located in front of the left side part of the upper middle base 651 in the left-right direction and from the right side part. Is also located rearward, and the substrate portion 662b of the left decorative base 662 is located in front of the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the upper middle base 651. Further, the upper middle left decorative unit 660 is attached so that the arc side of the semicircular upper middle left decorative body 661 faces clockwise in the front view with respect to the left shaft portion 651a of the upper middle base 651. ..

Further, in the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660, the front surface of the semicircular upper middle left decorative body 661 is the front surface of the central movable decorative body 553 in the central movable decorative body unit 550 of the central movable effect unit 500, and the front-rear direction. It is formed so that the positions of are substantially the same. Further, the decorative body mounting portion 662a of the left decorative body base 662 is formed so as to be located in front of the advancing / retreating unit 530 of the central movable effect unit 500.

The upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 is a semicircular ring-shaped upper middle right decorative body 671 having a translucent front surface and a right decorative body to which the upper middle right decorative body 671 is attached from the rear side. It is equipped with a body base 672, an upper middle right decorative board (not shown) mounted between the right decorative base 672 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. There is. The upper middle right decorative body 671 can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately causing the LED of the upper middle right decorative substrate to emit light. The semicircular upper middle right decorative body 671 is formed so that the radius on the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the radius of the central movable decorative body 553 in the central movable effect unit 500, and the radius on the outer peripheral side is a frame-shaped unit base. It is formed to be slightly smaller than the height in the frame in 601.

The right decorative body base 672 has a semicircular annular decorative body mounting portion 672a to which the upper middle right decorative body 671 is mounted on the front surface, and a flat plate-shaped extending outward from one end of the decorative body mounting portion 672a. The substrate portion 672b, the rotary bearing portion 672c rotatably attached to the right shaft portion 651b of the upper middle base 651 at the tip of the substrate portion 672b, and the rotary bearing portion 672c and the decorative body mounting portion 672a in the substrate portion 672b. It is provided with a long hole-shaped right transmission slit 672d that penetrates back and forth between the two.

In the right decorative body base 672, at one end of the semicircular decorative body mounting portion 672a, the substrate portion 672b extends in a direction away from the center of the semicircle on the side opposite to the arc side. The substrate portion 672b of the right decorative body base 672 has a portion extending from the decorative body mounting portion 672a, once extending forward and backward, and then extending in parallel with the front surface of the decorative body mounting portion 672a, and has a plan view shape. Is formed in a crank shape. The left transmission pin 682 of the transmission slider 680 is slidably inserted into the right transmission slit 672d of the right decoration base 672.

In the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670, the upper middle right decorative body 671 and the decorative body mounting portion 672a of the right decorative body base 672 are behind the right side part from the center in the left-right direction of the upper middle right base 651 and from the left side part. Is also located in front, and the substrate portion 672b of the right decorative base 672 is located on the rear surface of the portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the upper middle base 651. Further, in the upper middle right decorative unit 670, the arc side of the semicircular upper middle right decorative body 671 faces counterclockwise in the front view with the right shaft portion 651b of the upper middle base 651 as the center. Can be installed.

Further, in the upper middle right movable decorative unit 670, the front surface of the semicircular upper middle right decorative body 671 is the front surface of the central movable decorative body 553 in the central movable decorative body unit 550 of the central movable effect unit 500, and the front-rear direction. It is formed so that the positions of are substantially the same. Further, the decorative body mounting portion 672a of the right decorative body base 672 is formed so as to be located in front of the advancing / retreating unit 530 of the central movable effect unit 500.

The transmission slider 680 of the upper-middle movable effect knit 650 is slidably attached up and down by a guide groove (not shown) of the upper-middle base 651. The transmission slider 680 is slidably inserted into the left transmission slit 662d of the left decorative body base 662 into the left transmission pin 681 and directly below the left transmission pin 681 into the right transmission slit 672d of the right decorative body base 672. It is equipped with a right transmission pin 682 that is slidably inserted.

The left transmission pin 681 and the right transmission pin 682 of the transmission slider 680 are shafts that pass through the center between the left shaft portion 651a and the right shaft portion 651b in a state where the transmission slider 680 is slidably attached to the upper middle base 651. It is formed so as to be located on the line.

The rotation drive mechanism 690 of the upper-middle movable effect unit 650 includes an upper-middle drive motor 691 mounted on the rear surface of the upper right corner of the upper-middle base 651 so that the rotation axis penetrates and protrudes forward, and an upper-middle drive. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 692 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 691, a spur gear-shaped driven gear portion 693a that meshes with the drive gear 692, an extension portion 693b extending outward from the driven gear portion 693a, and It has a drive bearing portion 693c that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the tip of the extending portion 693b, and has a cam member 693 that is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the front cover 652 and a rod-shaped cam member 693 at one end. Link rod having a drive pin 694a rotatably inserted into the drive bearing portion 693c of the It is equipped with 694.

The cam member 693 of the rotation drive mechanism 690 is rotatably attached to the front cover 652 on the same center as the driven gear portion 693a. As a result, when the cam member 693 is rotated, the drive bearing portion 693c at the tip of the extending portion 693b revolves with a predetermined radius.

Next, the operation of the upper-middle movable effect unit 650 will be described. In the normal state, the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 are entirely located directly behind the front cover 652, and can be visually recognized from the player side. It is in an impossible state (state of retracted position). In this retracted position, as shown in FIG. 37, the upper-middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 rotatably attached to the left shaft portion 651a of the upper-middle base 651 has a left shaft portion 651a (rotating bearing). The left transmission slit 662d of the left decorative body base 662 is located diagonally to the upper left of the front view from the portion 662c), and the tip side (free end side) of the semicircular ring is located slightly below the left shaft portion 651a. .. Further, in the left decorative body base 662, the acting bearing portion 662e is located at substantially the same height as the rotation center of the cam member 693 at the diagonally upper right of the front view of the rotary bearing portion 662c. Further, the detection piece 662f of the left decorative body base 662 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 653.

The link rod 694 to which the action pin 694b is rotatably attached to the action bearing portion 662e of the left decorative body base 662 so as to straddle the center of rotation behind the cam member 693 from the action bearing portion 662e to the right in the front view. The drive pin 694a at the end opposite to the working pin 694b is located on the right side of the front view of the rotation center of the cam member 693 and can rotate to the drive bearing portion 693c of the cam member 693. It is installed. As a result, the extending portion 693b of the cam member 693 extends substantially horizontally from the driven gear portion 693a to the right in the front view.

Further, in the retracted position, the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 rotatably attached to the right shaft portion 651b of the upper middle base 651 is from the right shaft portion 651b (rotating bearing portion 672c). The right transmission slit 672d of the right decorative body base 672 is located diagonally to the upper right of the front view, and the tip side (free end side) of the semicircular ring is located slightly below the right shaft portion 651b. The right transmission slit 672d of the right decorative body base 672 is located below the left transmission slit 662d of the left decorative body base 662. The left transmission pin 681 and the right transmission pin 682 arranged above and below the transmission slider 680 are slidably inserted into the left transmission slit 662d and the right transmission slit 672d, respectively.

In this retracted position (normal state), when the cam member 693 is driven to rotate in the front-view clockwise direction by the upper-middle drive motor 691 according to the gaming state, the cam member 693 is driven with respect to the rotation center. The eccentric drive bearing portion 693c revolves so as to move to the left and downward in the front view. As the drive bearing portion 693c revolves, the drive pin 694a of the link rod 694 attached to the drive bearing portion 693c causes the link rod 694 to move to the left as a whole, and the action pin 694b of the link rod 694 tends to move to the left. The acting bearing portion 662e of the left decorative body base 662 is pressed to the left in the front view.

When the action bearing portion 662e is pressed to the left in the front view by the link rod 694, the left decorative body base 662 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view around the left shaft portion 651a, and the left decorative body base The tip end side of the semicircular ring-shaped decorative body mounting portion 662a of 662 moves downward. Then, when the left decorative body base 662 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the left shaft portion 651a, the left transmission slit 662d formed in the substrate portion 662b revolves so as to move downward. .. When the left transmission slit 662d revolves so as to move downward in the front view, the left transmission pin 681 inserted in the left transmission slit 662d is pressed downward by the inner peripheral surface of the left transmission slit 662d, and the left transmission pin 681 is pressed downward. The transmission slider 680 will slide straight down through the.

When the transmission slider 680 slides downward, the right transmission pin 682 located directly under the left transmission pin 681 also moves downward, so that the left transmission pin 682 is inserted by moving the left transmission pin 682 downward. The right transmission slit 672d of the right decorative body base 672 is pressed downward. When the right transmission slit 672d is pressed downward by the right transmission pin 682, the right decorative body base 672 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view around the right shaft portion 651b, and the right decorative body The tip end side of the semicircular decorative body mounting portion 672a in the base 672 moves downward.

In this way, when the cam member 693 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction by the upper-middle drive motor 691, the upper-middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 and the upper-middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 are rotated in the counterclockwise direction. And, respectively, in the clockwise direction, the semicircular upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 move downward while rotating (see FIG. 38 (b)). When the upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 move downward while rotating, the upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 are respectively below the front cover 652 in front view from the tip side. The parts are sequentially moved to (inside the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 601 in the front view), and the portion located below the front cover 652 becomes visible (appears) from the player side.

Then, when the cam member 693 is further rotated in the front-view clockwise direction by the upper-middle drive motor 691, the tips of the semicircular upper-middle left decorative body 661 and the upper-middle right decorative body 671 come into contact with each other. The rotation of the upper middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 is stopped, and the rotation drive of the upper middle drive motor 691 is stopped. As a result, the entire upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 are located below the front cover 652 and can be visually recognized from the player side, and the upper middle left decorative body is located below the front cover 652. The 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 form a large annular decorative body (state of appearance position) (see FIG. 37 (c)).

[5-6c. Operation of the upper movable production unit]
Next, the operation of the upper movable effect unit 600 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 39. In the upper-middle movable effect unit 600, in a normal state, a pair of upper-horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 of the upper-horizontal movable effect unit 610 are located near both the left and right sides in the frame of the unit base 601 and the upper-middle movable effect is produced. A pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and upper middle right decorative body 671 of the unit 650 are respectively located above the frame of the unit base 601. In this normal state, only a pair of upper / horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the pair of upper / horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 decorate the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display device 450 in the front view. (See FIG. 15 (a) and the like). In a normal state, a pair of upper and lateral movable decorative bodies 612 are rotated by a predetermined angle with respect to an axis extending vertically, and the front surfaces thereof face the center side in the frame of the unit base 601. ..

In this normal state, by driving a pair of upper-horizontal drive motors (not shown) of the upper-horizontal movable effect unit 610, a pair of upper-horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 located at both left and right ends in the frame of the unit base 601 can be formed. , Can be moved to a position closer to the center in the left-right direction of the front view. At this time, the pair of upper and lateral movable decorative bodies 612 rotate around an axis extending up and down, respectively, so that the front surface faces directly in front. By moving the pair of upper and horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 to the center side, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 450 can be divided into three in the left-right direction. The pair of upper and horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 can be independently moved in the left-right direction, and by moving both at the same time or moving only one of them, a variety of movable effects are presented to the player. can do.

Further, by driving the upper-middle drive motor 691 of the upper-middle movable effect unit 650 under normal conditions, a pair of semi-circular upper-middle left decorative bodies located above the frame of the unit base 601. The upper middle right decorative body 671 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 can be lowered while rotating, and the ends of the respective bodies can be brought into contact with each other to be united. The body can be made visible from the player side (see FIG. 39). In the state where the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 appear, the annular decorative body formed by the upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 is the unit base 601. It is located in the center of the frame and stands out from the player side.

The upper middle movable effect unit 600 includes a pair of upper middle movable decorative bodies 612 of the upper horizontal movable effect unit 610, and a pair of upper middle left decorative bodies 661 and upper middle right decorative bodies 671 of the upper middle movable effect unit 650. Since they are arranged at different positions in the front-back direction, for example, after moving the pair of upper-horizontal movable ornaments 612 to the center side, the pair of upper-middle left decorative bodies 661 and upper-middle right decorative bodies 671 are placed in the appearance positions. After moving the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 to the appearance position, the pair of upper middle left movable decoration body 612 can be moved to the center side, or the pair of upper middle horizontal movable decoration body The 612 and the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and upper middle right decorative body 671 can be moved to the center side, and various movable patterns can be presented to the player to make it difficult for the player to get bored. be able to.

Further, in the upper movable effect unit 600, the center of the annular decorative body formed when the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 of the upper middle movable effect unit 650 are moved to the appearance position is , The center of the central movable decorative body 553 when the central movable decorative body unit 550 in the central movable effect unit 500 is positioned at the rising end is substantially coincident with the center. Therefore, in front view, the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and upper middle right decorative body 671 can be decorated so as to surround the outer circumference of the central movable decorative body 553 located at the rising end (see FIG. 42). ..

Further, in the upper movable effect unit 600, the front surfaces of the pair of upper middle left decorative bodies 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 of the upper middle movable effect unit 650 are positioned in the front-rear direction with the front surface of the central movable decorative body 553. The central movable decorative body 553 is moved to the appearance position by moving the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 in a state where the central movable decorative body 553 is positioned at the rising end. When surrounding (combining) the outer periphery of the above, the central movable decorative body 553, and the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and upper middle right decorative body 671 can form one large disk-shaped decorative body. It can be made to stand out from the player side and give a strong impact to the player.

At this time, since the outer circumference of the central movable decorative body 553 can be guided by the inner circumferences of the pair of upper middle left decorative bodies 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671, the outer circumference of the central movable decorative body 553 can be guided on the pair of upper surfaces. When the central movable decorative body 553 is rotated while being surrounded (combined) by the middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671, the left and right blurring of the central movable decorative body 553 due to the rotation is caused by a pair of upper middle left decorations. It can be suppressed by the body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671, and the central movable decorative body 553 can be rotated in a good state. Therefore, the center of one large disk-shaped decorative body (central movable decorative body 553) formed by combining the central movable decorative body 553 with the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 rotates. Since the effect to be performed can be shown to the player, it is possible to give a stronger impact to the player, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[5-7. Horizontal movable production unit]
The lateral movable effect unit 700 of the middle unit 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The lateral movable effect unit 700 is attached to the inside of the left and right side portions 401 of the middle unit base 400, respectively. The lateral movable effect unit 700 includes a pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right sides and have a substantially rectangular shape in front view and can display a predetermined effect image, and a sub-left. A left rotation drive mechanism 730L and a right rotation drive mechanism 730R, a left rotation drive mechanism 730L, and a right rotation drive mechanism that rotate the liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R around an axis extending back and forth, respectively. The left elevating drive mechanism 750L and the right elevating drive mechanism 750R, which are attached to the middle unit base 400 by moving the 730R up and down, and the left elevating drive mechanism 750L and the right elevating drive mechanism 750R, are installed in the middle unit base 400. It is provided with a horizontal left decorative member 770L and a horizontal right decorative member 770R.

The sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R of the horizontal movable effect unit 700 are formed symmetrically with each other. The sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R have a substantially rectangular outer shape in front view, and the length of the long side is such that the inner surfaces of the pair of side portions 401 in the middle unit base 400 are connected to each other. The length is about 2/5 of the distance dimension, and the length of the short side is slightly longer than the height of the base cover 520 in the central movable effect unit 500.

The sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R have a rectangular display screen 711 on which an effect image is displayed, and a frame-shaped decorative frame member 712 that decorates the outer periphery of the display screen and has translucency. The sub liquid crystal decorative substrate 713, which is arranged behind the decorative frame member 712 and the display screen 711 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the decorative frame member 712 so as to cover the rear surface of the sub liquid crystal decorative substrate 713. Each includes a sub liquid crystal base 714 attached to the rear side and a flat plate-shaped weight 714 attached to the rear surface of the sub liquid crystal base 714.

The decorative frame member 712 has a three-dimensional decoration imitating a nail formed on a portion constituting two short sides. The sub liquid crystal decorative substrate 713 has a width shorter than the short side of the rectangular display screen 711 and extends longer than the long side of the display screen 711, and extends outward from the two short sides of the display screen 711 in front view. It is assembled so as to have a protruding portion, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion extending outward from the two short sides of the display screen 711. As a result, by emitting the LED of the sub liquid crystal decorative substrate 713, the portion of the decorative frame member 712 on which the nail decoration is formed can be light-emitting and decorated.

Although not shown, the sub liquid crystal base 714 has a rotation axis protruding rearward from one of the four corners on the rear surface. In the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, the rotation shaft of the sub liquid crystal base 714 is attached to the bearing portion of the rotation drive base (not shown) in the left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R, respectively. When attached, it can rotate around an axis that extends back and forth. The weight 715 is formed of a metal plate such as an iron plate, and is attached along the long side of the two long sides on the rear surface of the sub liquid crystal base 714, which is closer to the rotation axis.

Although not shown, the left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R include a bearing portion through which the rotation shaft of the sub liquid crystal base 714 is rotatably inserted, and a left lift drive mechanism 750L or a right lift drive mechanism. Attached to the tip (rear end) of the rotary shaft of the rotary drive base having a nut hole through which the elevating drive shaft (not shown) in the 750R is inserted and the sub liquid crystal base 714 that penetrates the bearing portion on the rear side of the rotary drive base. An actuating rotating member having an actuating pin at a position eccentric from the rotary shaft, a lateral rotary drive motor mounted on the front surface of the rotary drive base so that the rotary shaft protrudes rearward, and a lateral rotary drive. A drive rotating member that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor and has a drive pin at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and one end side is rotatably attached to the drive pin of the drive rotating member, and the other end side is attached to the operating pin of the operating rotating member. It is equipped with a connecting rod that is rotatably attached and an elevating slider that is attached to the rear side of the rotary drive base and is rotatably attached to the guide base 751 of the left elevating drive mechanism 750L or the right elevating drive mechanism 750R. ..

Further, the left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R have a cover attached to the front surface of the rotation drive base so as to cover the front side of the lateral rotation drive motor, and slide in the vertical direction on the rotation drive base. It is possibly attached and includes an assist slider that slides up and down as the actuating rotating member rotates, and an assist spring that urges the assist slider to rise.

The nut hole of the rotary drive base has a plurality of protrusions inside, and these protrusions are inserted into the spiral groove of the lift drive shaft in the left lift drive mechanism 750L and the right lift drive mechanism 750R to drive the lift. Can be screwed to the shaft.

The actuating rotating member has a fan-shaped gear portion centered on a rotating shaft, and when this gear portion meshes with the rack gear of the assist slider, the assist slider is slid up and down by the rotation of the operating rotating member. be able to. Further, the operating rotating member has a restricting piece protruding outward, and the end portion of the restricting piece comes into contact with a predetermined position of the rotating drive base, so that the rotating range of the operating rotating member is restricted. There is.

In the assembled state of the left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R, the operation pin of the operation rotation member is located on the outer side in the left-right direction with respect to the center of rotation (center of the rotation axis). , The assist slider is arranged inward in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of the operating rotating member.

The left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R can rotate the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 730L by 90 degrees with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, respectively. .. Specifically, in the left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 730L having a rectangular outer shape are horizontally arranged around the rotation axis of the sub liquid crystal base 714. It can be rotated between the extended state and the vertically extended (standing) state.

The left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R include a rotation regulation mechanism that regulates the rotation range of the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 730L. With this rotation regulation mechanism, it is possible to prevent the tip (upper end) from rotating (falling down) to the opposite side when the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 730L are started up, and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 730L is horizontal. When set to, it is possible to prevent the tip from further rotating downward.

The assist spring is urged to rotate in the rising direction of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 730L via the assist slider, and is driven by lateral rotation when the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 730L are raised from a horizontal state. The load acting on the motor is reduced.

The left elevating drive mechanism 750L and the right elevating drive mechanism 750R extend over substantially the entire height of the side portion 401 of the middle unit base 400, and are attached to the guide bases 751 near both left and right ends in the frame of the middle unit base 400, respectively. The upper base 752 attached to the upper end of the guide base 751, the lower base 753 attached to the lower end of the guide base 751, and the upper end and the lower end are rotatably attached to the upper base 752 and the lower base 753, respectively, and a spiral groove is formed on the outer periphery. A lift drive shaft (not shown), a spur gear-shaped shaft gear attached to the upper end of the lift drive shaft (not shown), and a spur gear-shaped drive gear that meshes with the shaft gear (not shown). The drive gear is attached to the rotating shaft, and the lateral elevating drive motor 757 (757L, 757R) is attached to the upper base 752.

The guide rail 751 is formed so that both the left and right ends of the strip extending vertically are bent forward. In the guide base 751, the elevating slider of the left rotation drive mechanism 730L or the right rotation drive mechanism 730R is inserted from the front. As a result, the guide base 751 can guide the elevating slider only in the vertical direction.

The left elevating drive mechanism 750L and the right elevating drive mechanism 750R have a spiral formed on the outer periphery by inserting the elevating drive shaft into the nut holes of the rotation drive base in the left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730L. The groove allows screw connection with the nut hole. The left elevating drive mechanism 750L and the right elevating drive mechanism 750R can rotate the elevating drive shaft by driving the lateral elevating drive motor 757L and the lateral elevating drive motor 757R, respectively.

The horizontal left decorative member 770L and the horizontal right decorative member 770R are a horizontal upper decorative body 771 arranged on both left and right sides between the upper connecting portion 402 and the middle connecting portion 403 in the frame-shaped middle unit base 400. A horizontal lower decorative body 772 extending from the lower end of the horizontal upper decorative body 771 to the lower connecting portion 404 of the middle unit base 400 and having translucency, and a plurality of LEDs arranged behind the horizontal lower decorative body 772 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. It is equipped with a horizontal lower decorative board (not shown) on which the light is mounted.

The lateral left decorative member 770L and the horizontal right decorative member 770R are arranged so as to cover the front of the elevating drive shaft in the left elevating drive mechanism 750L and the right elevating drive mechanism 750R.

The lateral upper decorative body 771 is bent so that the side close to the center of the middle unit base 400 faces rearward at substantially the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. The lateral sub-decorative body 772 is formed in a flat plate shape with the front surface facing the front. The horizontal lower decorative body 772 can be decorated by light emission by appropriately causing the LED of the horizontal lower decorative substrate to emit light.

[5-7a. Operation of the horizontal movable production unit]
Next, the operation of the horizontal movable effect unit 700 will be described. In the horizontal movable effect unit 700, a pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and a sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are provided between the front movable decorative body 310 of the front movable effect unit 300 and the game unit 3 (three reels 70). It is arranged in the reel 70 and can be moved to the front of the reel 70 (design display area A). In the normal state, the horizontal movable effect unit 700 has the same height as the central movable effect unit 500 with the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R extending in the horizontal direction. positioned. Therefore, when the central movable decorative unit 550 of the central movable effect unit 500 is located at the descending end, a pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display devices 710R are placed on the left and right sides of the central rotating decorative body 553. They are located respectively (see FIG. 15 (a) and the like).

In this normal state, the regulation piece of the operating rotation member in the left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R is in contact with a predetermined position of the rotation drive base, and the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 710L. The tip side of each of the display devices 710R is prevented from further rotating so as to move downward.

Under normal conditions, the operating rotating member is rotated counterclockwise and clockwise by driving the horizontal rotation drive motors of the left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R, respectively. Then, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, which are horizontally extended, rotate so that the tips of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are raised, and the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are respectively. It will be in an upright position extending up and down. At this time, the assist springs of the left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R rotate in the counterclockwise direction and the clockwise direction in the front view with respect to the respective operating rotation members. Assisting.

When the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are upright by the left rotation drive mechanism 730L and the right rotation drive mechanism 730R, the control piece of the operating rotation member is placed at a predetermined position on the rotation drive base. The sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are in contact with each other to prevent the tip side (upper end side) of each from rotating so as to move outward in the left-right direction of the middle unit base 400. There is. Further, in the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, the weights 715 provided respectively are located outside the rotation axis of the sub liquid crystal base 714 in the left-right direction in the middle unit base 400. There is. As a result, the weight 715 exerts rotational moments on the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R in the counterclockwise direction and the clockwise direction, respectively, with respect to the rotation axis. It becomes. Therefore, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R rotate so that the tip side (upper end side) of each moves outward in the left-right direction of the middle unit base 400 due to the rotational moments acting on each. Is suppressed.

Further, in a normal state, when the horizontal elevating drive motor 757L corresponding to the left elevating drive mechanism 750L is driven to rotate the elevating drive shaft, the left rotation drive mechanism 730L is rotated according to the rotation direction of the elevating drive shaft. The sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L can be moved up and down via the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L. Similarly, when the horizontal elevating drive motor 757R corresponding to the right elevating drive mechanism 750R is driven to rotate the elevating drive shaft, the sub-right via the right rotation drive mechanism 730R according to the rotation direction of the elevating drive shaft. The liquid crystal display device 710R can be raised and lowered. By driving both the lateral elevating drive motor 757L and the lateral elevating drive motor 757R, both the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710R can be moved up and down. In the present embodiment, the elevating drive shaft can be raised by rotating it in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and can be lowered by rotating it in a clockwise direction in a plan view.

When the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R are upright, the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R are the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the three reels 70 in the game unit 3, respectively. It is located on both the left and right sides (see FIGS. 46 and 47, etc.). In this state, regardless of the height of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, the three reels 70 and the main liquid crystal display device 450 can be visually recognized from the player side in good condition.

Further, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R can be moved up and down in a horizontally extended state. When the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are moved horizontally below the central movable effect unit 500, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R become reels. It will move to the front side of the 70, and the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R will play the symbols of the left reel 70L and the right reel 70R on both the left and right sides of the three reels 70. It can be hidden from the person's side invisible (see FIG. 45).

The horizontal movable effect unit 700 of the present embodiment has the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710L in a state where the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are moved to the lowermost position (downward end) while being upright. The sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R cannot be rotated in a horizontally extended state. Further, in a state where the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are horizontally extended, they cannot move downward from the middle symbol in the symbol display area A in the front view. That is, the horizontal movable effect unit 700 is configured (controlled) so that the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are not located in front of the lower stage (effective line), and is effective from the player side. The design on the line is always visible.

As described above, according to the lateral movable effect unit 700 of the present embodiment, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are rotated or moved up and down according to the gaming state. In addition to being able to perform a variety of movable effects, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R can display a variety of production images, making the player more entertaining and reducing the interest. It can be suppressed.

[5-8. Status indicator]
Next, the state indicator 800 in the middle unit 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17. The status indicator 800 extends long to the left and right, and is attached to the vicinity of the front end of the upper surface in the left-right direction of the lower connecting portion 404 in the middle unit base 400. The status display 800 is paid out according to a combination of a storage display 801 that displays the number of stored medals that are inserted into the insertion slot 123 and can be used for the game, and a symbol displayed by stopping the three reels 70. A combination of a payout display 802 that displays the number of medals paid out, a bet display 803 that displays the number of medals (number of bets) used in one game, and a symbol displayed by stopping the three reels 70. When the number of medals stored on the replay display 804 that displays "replay", the start display 805 that displays that the game can be started, and the storage display 801 becomes "0" A lighting indicator 806 and a lighting indicator 806 are provided on the front surface.

The storage display 801 is composed of two 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side, and displays the number of medals stored by Arabic numerals. The payout display 802 is composed of two 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side, and displays the number of medals paid out by Arabic numerals. The bet display 803 is composed of three LEDs arranged side by side, and displays by lighting 1 bet, 2 bets, and 3 bets (MAX bets) from the left side.

The re-game display 804 is composed of one LED, and by lighting it, it indicates that the re-game is possible. The start indicator 805 is composed of one LED, and by lighting it, it indicates that the operation of the start lever 129 can be accepted (the rotation of the reel 70 can be started). The insertion indicator 806 is composed of one LED, and when it lights up, it indicates that the number of stored medals is "0" and at the same time prompts the insertion of medals into the insertion slot 123.

In the status indicator 800, the storage indicator 801 and the payout indicator 802 are arranged near the left end of the front view, and the bet indicator 803, the replay indicator 804, the start indicator 805, and the input indicator 806 are viewed from the front. It is located near the right end.

The state display 800 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the width of the three reels 70 arranged side by side in the game unit 3. The status display 800 is arranged in front of the three reels 70 of the game unit 3 and directly below the lower effective line in a state of being assembled in the slot machine 1 (see FIG. 4 and the like). As a result, since the status display 800 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the game area in which the reel 70 is rotated to display a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, the reel 70 is rotated during the game. Since the status display 800 can be visually recognized from the reel 70 (variable symbol) with a slight movement of the line of sight, the current situation can be recognized without overlooking the variable display of the symbol, and the slot machine 1 is easy to play. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the status display 800 is inclined so that the front surface faces the front and the upper side. More specifically, the front surface of the status indicator 800 is tilted so that the vertical line extending forward from the front surface of the status indicator 800 intersects the line extending horizontally forward from the front surface of the symbol display area A. .. As a result, the front surface of the status display 800 is directed toward the player located in front of the slot machine 1, and the status display 800 is more easily visible from the player side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15B, the status display 800 is provided with a setting display 810 on the rear surface. The setting display 810 is composed of one 7-segment LED. The setting display 810 displays the number of the game mode set by operating the setting switch 62 in the switch unit 60 of the housing unit 2 in Arabic numerals.

The status display 800 and the setting display 810 are connected to the main control board 21 of the main control unit 20, and the game state and the game mode (setting state) are displayed by the main control board 21. ..

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game mode setting display 810 is arranged on the rear surface of the status display 800 in the middle unit 5, that is, on the rear surface of the middle unit 5 attached to the rear side of the door unit 4. Therefore, when the door unit 4 is opened from the housing unit 2 when the setting mode is changed, the setting switch 62 attached to the housing unit 2 and the door unit 4 (middle unit 5) are attached to the setting switch 62. The setting display 810 is located at a position that is easy for the operator to see, which facilitates the setting work of the game mode.

[5-9. Decorative drive board unit]
Next, the decorative drive board unit 900 in the middle unit 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20. The decorative drive board unit 900 is attached so as to cover the rear side of the main liquid crystal display device 450 (peripheral control unit 470) on the rear surface of the middle unit base 400. The decorative drive board unit 900 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped decorative drive board 901 extending to the left and right, a board base 902 to which the front side of the decorative drive board 901 is attached, and a board base 902 attached to the rear surface of the middle unit base 400, and a board base 902. A board cover 903 attached so as to cover the rear surface of the decorative drive board 901 is provided on the rear side.

The decorative drive board 901 is a drive motor, a decorative board, and a sub of the central movable effect unit 500, the upper movable effect unit 600, and the horizontal movable effect unit 700 in response to the control commands from the peripheral control board 471 and the display control board 473. It controls the left liquid crystal display device 710L, the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R, and the like.

The board base 902 has a flat plate-shaped board mounting portion 902a that is slightly larger than the decorative drive board 901, and a hinge portion that protrudes from the left side of the board mounting portion 902a and is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the middle unit base 400. It includes a 902b and a locking portion 902c that extends to the left from the upper part of the right side of the board mounting portion 902a when viewed from the front and is detachably mounted on the rear surface of the middle unit base 400.

The board base 903 is mounted on the rear side of the board mounting portion 902a of the board base 902, and the rear side of the decorative drive board 901 is provided so that a plurality of connectors provided on the rear surface of the decorative drive board 901 face the rear. It is covered.

[6. Movable effect and light emission effect]
Next, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the top cover unit 200 of the door unit 4, the front movable effect unit 300, the central movable effect unit 500 of the middle unit 5, the upper movable effect unit 600, and the lateral movable effect unit 700. The movable effect and the light emitting effect using the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 4, 40 to 48. FIG. 40 is a front view of a slot machine showing a state in which the front movable decorative body of the front movable effect unit is positioned at a descending end. FIG. 41 is a front view of the slot machine showing the central movable decorative body unit of the central movable effect unit positioned at the ascending end, and FIG. 42 shows the upper middle left decorative body and the upper middle left decorative body of the upper movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 41. It is a front view of the slot machine showing the state where the upper middle right decorative body is moved to the appearance position, and FIG. 43 shows the pair of upper horizontal movable decoration bodies 612 of the upper movable effect unit moved from the state of FIG. 42 to the center side. It is a front view of the slot machine shown in the vertical state, and FIG. 44 is a front view of the slot machine showing the sub-left liquid crystal display device and the sub-right liquid crystal display device of the lateral movable effect unit in an upright state from the state of FIG. 43. be.

FIG. 45 is a front view of a slot machine showing a state in which the sub-left liquid crystal display device and the sub-right liquid crystal display device of the horizontal movable effect unit are lowered to the front side of the symbol display area while being horizontally extended. Further, FIG. 46 is a front view of the slot machine showing a state in which the sub-left liquid crystal display device and the sub-right liquid crystal display device of the horizontal movable effect unit are placed upright on both the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display device. FIG. 46 is a front view of a slot machine showing a state in which the sub-left liquid crystal display device and the sub-right liquid crystal display device of the horizontal movable effect unit are lowered from the state of FIG. 46 and positioned on the left and right sides of the symbol display area. Further, FIG. 48 is a front view of the slot machine showing a state in which the light guide plate of the top cover unit is light-emittingly decorated. In FIG. 47, both the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R of the horizontal movable effect unit are lowered to be located on the left and right sides of the symbol display area. In 1, only the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L or the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R is lowered to be positioned on the left side or the right side of the symbol display area.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, in the normal state, the front movable decorative body 310 of the front movable effect unit 300 is located at the rising end, and the front movable decorative body 310 is located at the rising end of the slot machine 1 from the main liquid crystal display device 450 in front view. Is also located on the upper side. Further, in a normal state, the central movable decorative body unit 550 of the central movable effect unit 500 in the middle unit 5 is located at the descending end, and the symbol display area A composed of three reels 70 in the game unit 3 is viewed from the front. It is located between the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the main liquid crystal display device 450.

Further, in a normal state, the pair of upper and lateral movable decorative bodies 612 of the upper movable effect unit 600 in the middle unit 5 are located at the most distant positions from each other, and the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display device 450 are viewed from the front. It is located on each side. Further, in a normal state, the upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 of the upper movable effect unit 600 are located in the retracted positions, respectively, and the front cover 652 is above the main liquid crystal display device 450 in the front view. It is located on the rear side. In this normal state, the upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 of the upper movable effect unit 600 are invisible from the player side.

Further, in a normal state, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R of the horizontal movable effect unit 700 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction in a horizontally extended state, and are viewed from the front. The central movable decorative unit 550 is located on both the left and right sides of the central movable decorative unit 550 so as to cover the front surface of the base cover 520 of the central movable effect unit 500.

In this normal state, the light guide plate 202 of the top cover unit 200 is not light-emittingly decorated, and the symbols are combined by the three reels 70 of the game unit 3 arranged on the rear side through the window portion 201a of the transparent top cover 201. The symbol display area A on which is displayed, the main liquid crystal display device 450, the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L, the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, a symbol display area A for displaying a symbol from below using three reels 70 in a window portion 201a occupying an upper side from substantially the center in the vertical direction of the front view. A sub-effect display area B for displaying an effect image using a pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and a sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, a main effect display area C for displaying an effect image using the main liquid crystal display device 450, and a front movable It has four areas, a logo display area D using the decorative body 310.

In this normal state, when the front left drive motor 324 and the front right drive motor 325 of the front movable effect unit 300 are rotationally driven according to the gaming state, the front movable decorative body 310 located at the rising end becomes the symbol display area A. It descends at a stretch to the position of the descending end on the front side of the three reels 70 so as to hide a part of the reel (see FIG. 40). As a result, the player can be surprised by the large front movable decorative body 310 extending to the left and right in front of the player's eyes and descending so as to fall. When the front movable decoration 310 is positioned at the descending end, as shown in FIG. 40, most of the lower side of the front movable decoration 310 is located above the lower end of the window portion 201a, so that the front movable decoration is decorated. On the lower side of the body 310, only the symbol in the lower row (effective line) in the symbol display area A can be clearly seen.

When the front movable decorative body 310 is moved to the descending end while the symbol is changing (at least one of the three reels 70 is rotating), only the symbol located in the lower stage (effective line) in the symbol display area A is used. Since it cannot be visually recognized well, the difficulty of "pressing" to operate the stop button 128 so that the desired symbol is stopped and displayed becomes high. As a result, it is possible to arouse the challenge spirit to the player, and it is possible to concentrate on the "pushing" and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the variation of all the symbols is stopped and the front movable decorative body 310 is moved to the descending end, only the symbols located in the lower stage (effective line) of the symbol display area A by the front movable decorative body 310 are displayed. Since it is in a visible state, the player can immediately recognize the symbol stopped on the effective line, and can easily know whether or not the combination is given a privilege.

Further, in a normal state, when the central rotation drive motor 554 of the central movable effect unit 500 is rotationally driven according to the gaming state, the central movable decorative body 555 has a pair of sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. Rotate between and. Thereby, the player's attention can be attracted to the central movable decorative body 553.

Further, in a normal state, when the central elevating drive motor 571 of the central movable effect unit 500 is rotationally driven according to the gaming state, the central movable decorative unit 550 located substantially in the center of the front viewing window portion 201a rises. It rises to the edge position and is located in the center of the front view main liquid crystal display device 450 (see FIG. 41). As a result, the central movable decorative unit 550 is located in the center of the front surface of the main liquid crystal display device 450, so that the central movable decorative unit 550 becomes conspicuous, and the player can pay attention to the central movable decorative unit 550. can. By raising the central movable decorative unit 550, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. The central movable decorative body 535 may be rotated by the central rotation drive motor 554 with the central movable decorative body unit 550 positioned at the rising end.

When the upper-middle movable effect unit 650 upper-middle drive motor 691 in the upper-middle movable effect unit 600 is rotated with the central movable decorative unit 550 positioned at the rising end, the upper-middle movable effect unit 650 is retracted above the front view main liquid crystal display device 450. A pair of semi-circular upper middle left decorative bodies 661 and upper middle right decorative bodies 671 located at the positions move downward while rotating, and move downward around the outer periphery of the central movable decorative body 553 of the central movable decorative body unit 550. It will be enclosed (see FIG. 42). In this state, the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and upper middle right decorative body 671 are located in front of the advancing / retreating unit 530 (left unit 530L and right unit 530R) supporting the central movable decorative body unit 550. At the same time, the front surface of each of the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 substantially coincides with the front surface of the central movable decorative body 553, and the central movable decorative body 553 and the paired upper middle left decoration The body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 are combined to form one large disk-shaped decorative body. As a result, a large disk-shaped decorative body will appear on the front of the main liquid crystal display device 450, which can have a strong impact on the player and strongly make us think that something good is possible. It is possible to raise expectations for the game.

Further, in a state where the central movable decorative body 553 is combined with the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671, a pair of supporting the central movable decorative body 553 (central movable decorative body unit 550) is supported. A part of the front surface of the left unit 530L and the right unit 530R can be hidden by the front end side of each of the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and upper middle right decorative body 671, and the overall appearance can be improved. ..

In the state of FIG. 42, when the central movable decorative body 553 is rotated by the central rotary drive motor 554, the outer circumference of the central movable decorative body 553 is formed by the inner circumference of the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671. It will rotate in a guided state, and the left and right blurring of the central movable decorative body 553 due to rotation will be suppressed by the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and upper middle right decorative body 671, and the central movable decorative body 553 will shake left and right. It rotates in good condition without any problems. Therefore, the center of one large disk-shaped decorative body (central movable decorative body 553) formed by combining the central movable decorative body 553 with the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 rotates. Since the effect to be performed can be shown to the player, it is possible to give a stronger impact to the player, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when moving the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 from the retracted position to the appearance position, the upper middle left decorative body 661 separated from the left and right sides of the central movable decorative body 553 to the left and right. Since the upper, middle, and right decorative bodies 671 are united so as to sandwich the central movable decorative body 553, the player can be entertained by a large movement using the entire front surface of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 450 in the front view.

Illustration of the upper-horizontal movable effect unit 610 in the upper movable effect unit 600 with the pair of upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671 moved to the appearance position so as to surround the outer circumference of the central movable decorative body 533. When the upper-horizontal drive motor is rotated, a pair of upper-horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 located at the left and right ends of the front-view main liquid crystal display device 450 are replaced with the central movable decorative body 553, the upper middle left decorative body 661, and the upper middle right decoration. It moves to the center side of the main liquid crystal display device 450 behind the body 671 (see FIG. 43). As shown in FIG. 43, in a state where the pair of upper-horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 is moved from the distant position to the near-distance position, the pair of upper-horizontal movable decoration bodies 612 are each of the upper-middle-left decorative bodies in the front view. It is located to decorate the outer periphery of the upper middle right decorative body 671 and the upper middle right decorative body 671, and is a large disk-shaped decorative body formed by the central movable decorative body 553, the upper middle left decorative body 661 and the upper middle right decorative body 671. The left and right sides of the above are decorated with a pair of upper and horizontal movable decorative bodies 612. In this state, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 450 is divided into left and right by the central movable decorative body 553, the upper middle left decorative body 661, the upper middle right decorative body 671, and the pair of upper horizontal movable decorative bodies 612. It covers almost half of the whole, and it becomes extremely conspicuous from the player side, and it can strongly attract the interest of the player.

The central movable decorative body 553, the upper middle left decorative body 661, the upper middle right decorative body 671, and the pair of upper horizontal movable decorative bodies 612 are positioned in the center of the front surface of the front view main liquid crystal display device 450, and the lateral portion. When the horizontal rotation drive motor (not shown) of the movable effect unit 700 is rotated, a pair of horizontally extending sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display devices 710R are located on the upper left and right sides of each of the four corners. With the vicinity of the corner as the center, the tips near the center of the left and right rotate upward so that they stand upright (see FIG. 44). In this state, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are located on the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display device 450, respectively, in front view. As shown in FIG. 44, in this state, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are made to display the effect image so as to be continuous with the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 450. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 450 has spread to the left and right, and the player can be entertained.

Further, in a normal state, when the pair of horizontal elevating drive motors 757 of the horizontal movable effect unit 700 is rotated in a predetermined direction, the pair of horizontally extended sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are displayed. , Moves downward from the positions on both the left and right sides of the centrally movable decorative unit 550 of the centrally movable effect unit 500 (the position on the front surface of the base cover 520), and covers a part of the symbol display area A (FIG. 45). reference). As shown in FIG. 45, in this state, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are in the upper and middle stages of the left reel 70L and the right reel 70R among the three reels 70 arranged side by side. Only the three symbols in the lower row of the symbol display area A and the middle reel 70M can be clearly seen.

As an effect pattern for moving the pair of horizontally extended sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R downward (in front of the symbol display area A), for example, all the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (three). By lowering the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R to the state shown in FIG. 45 while one reel 70 is rotating), the left reel 70L and the right reel 70R are "pushed". With the middle reel 70M, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the "pressing", and it is possible to entertain the player by adding sharpness to the operation of the stop button 128. The sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R that cover the upper and middle stages of the reel 70 are provided with an effect image of a fluctuating pattern similar to the fluctuating display of the pattern due to the rotation of the reel 70. It may be displayed, and the player can be entertained by simultaneously showing the variable display of the symbol due to the rotation of the reel 70 and the variable display of the symbol by the effect image.

Alternatively, of the three rotating reels 70, the left reel 70L and the right reel 70R may be stopped, and the symbol stopped at the lower stage (effective line) may satisfy the combination of symbols giving the privilege. At the time of possible combination (so-called "reach"), the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R may be lowered to obtain the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, you can entertain the "reel".

Although not shown, one of the left reel 70L or the right reel 70R of the three reels 70 is moved downward by moving only one of the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. Only one reel 70 may be hidden between the upper and middle stages, so that the player can enjoy a wider variety of games and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Further, when the horizontal rotation drive motor (not shown) of the horizontal movable effect unit 700 is rotated in a normal state, a pair of horizontally extending sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display devices 710R are displayed, respectively. With the vicinity of the upper left and right outer corners of the four corners as the center, the tips near the center of the left and right rotate upward so that they stand upright (see FIG. 46). In this state, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are located outside the upper and lateral movable decorative bodies 612 on the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display device 450, respectively, in front view. The front surface of the base cover 520 of the central movable effect unit 500 becomes visible from the player side. In the state of FIG. 46, since the outer periphery of the three reels 70 arranged side by side is surrounded by the flat plate-shaped base cover 520 and the pair of horizontal lower decorative bodies 772, the three reels 70 (design display area A). ) Can be made to stand out, and the player can enjoy the operation of the stop button 128 (“pressing”).

When the horizontal elevating drive motor 757 is rotated in a predetermined direction while the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are upright, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display are displayed. The device 710R descends and is located on the left and right sides of the three reels 70 arranged side by side (see FIG. 47). In the state shown in FIG. 47, even if the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are made to display an effect image of a fluctuating symbol similar to the fluctuating symbol display due to the rotation of the reel 70. Well, this makes it possible to variablely display the five symbol rows arranged side by side together with the three reels 70, so that the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the LEDs of the decorative substrate 205 on the light guide plate and the decorative substrate 206 below the light guide plate of the top cover unit 200 are made to emit light in a normal state, the pattern provided on the light guide plate 202 can be light-emitting and decorated (FIG. 48). As shown in FIG. 48, when the light guide plate 202 is light-emittingly decorated, a character pattern according to the concept of the slot machine 1 is displayed on substantially the entire window portion 201a of the top cover 201. In this state, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 202 is shining, and a part of the three reels 70 (design display area A) of the game unit 3 arranged behind the light guide plate 202, the main liquid crystal display device 450, The sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L, the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, and the like are difficult to see from the player side. The light guide plate 202 has a non-decorative region 202a in which a pattern is not displayed (emission decoration) at the lower portion, and this non-decorative region 202a corresponds to the lower stage (effective line) of the symbol display region in front view. Therefore, even when the light guide plate 202 is light-emittingly decorated, the design located in the lower stage (effective line) can be satisfactorily visually recognized.

Then, for example, when the light guide plate 202 is light-emitting decorated with the three reels 70 rotated, as shown in FIG. 48, the symbols located in the upper and middle stages excluding the lower stage in the design display area become difficult to see. Therefore, it becomes difficult to "push" and the difficulty level becomes higher, which can improve the challenge spirit of the player and entertain, and at the same time, it seems that the difficulty level of "pushing" has increased. It is possible to convince the person that there must be something good to align the symbols in this state, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the game with various effects can be presented to the player, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and to entertain the player and enjoy the game. The decrease can be suppressed.

[7. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 49 schematically shows the configurations of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, and the like equipped in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 409 is equipped with a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, and the like. The main board 409 has a function that influences the result of the game (acquisition of the value for the game), specifically, for example, a lottery such as a winning combination, a bonus, and an ART first hit, and control of the game state based on the lottery result. , The decision of the instruction by the instruction function, and the payout based on the winning combination are managed.

Further, as an example of a configuration (not shown) in FIG. 49, the slot machine 1 includes a door open detection switch for detecting an open state of a door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 131 (storage medal clearing switch, and a return button). A lever detection sensor in the medal selector provided in the medal selector 207, a stop button LED (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) that can be lit around each of the reel stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R, etc. To prepare for. These configurations are controlled by the main board 409.

The above-mentioned single push button 130, start lever 129, reel stop button 128L, 128M, 128R, storage release switch 131, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons are played using sensors (not shown). It is possible to detect an operation by a person and output the detected operation signal to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 129 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-mentioned symbol variation display device (predetermined location where the symbol changes) (starting rotation of 70L, 70M, 70R) is transmitted to the main board 409. When the reel stop buttons 128L, 128M and 128R are output and the reel stop buttons 128L, 128M and 128R are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 70L, 70M and 70R is output to the main board 409.

In the following, the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R will be referred to as a left reel 70L, a middle reel 70M, and a right reel 70R, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 128L, 128M, and 128R are referred to as a left reel stop button 128L, a middle reel stop button 128M, and a right reel stop button 128R.

Further, the slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main board 409, and various signals are input to the main board 409 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device, the devices include a medal discharge device 110 and the like.

The symbol variation display device includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c for rotating the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R, respectively (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor consists of a stepping motor, and each reel 70L, 70M, 70R can rotate and stop independently, and at the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom on the symbol display window 401. It is displayed while changing to.

Further, it has position sensors 331a, 331b, 331c for detecting the reference position regarding the rotation of each reel 70L, 70M, 70R, and each reel 70L, 70M, 70R has a position sensor 331a, 331b, 331c, respectively. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c) are provided correspondingly to the inside. By inputting the detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain the stop position information of each reel.

The solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed in the medal selector 207. The insertion sensor 207b detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 123, and outputs the medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is ON, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. Even if the player inserts the medal, the medal selector 207 The medals that flowed through the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, so that neither betting nor storage of medals is performed by inserting medals.

The medal discharge device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the paid out medals one by one in the discharge port 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been done. Further, the auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full tank sensor 111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal in which the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is transmitted to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, an error display is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 450, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, etc. to notify the abnormality of the medal storage, and the player, the hall employee, etc. are notified that the abnormality has occurred (“auxiliary storage). Equivalent to "full tank error").

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c described above is output from the main board 409. Further, a drive signal is input from the main board 409 to the medal discharge device 110 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal discharge device 110 performs a medal payout operation in response to the input signal. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal discharge device 110, or if there are no medals at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e will be delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, an error signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 110e to the main board 409, and in response to this, the main board 409 indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. The content to be notified is displayed on the error lamp 604, the special display LED 612, the liquid crystal display device 450, etc. to notify the player, the hall employee, etc. that an abnormality has occurred (in the "payout medal empty error" shown in FIG. 80 described later). Equivalent). The main board 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by, for example, a harness, and the main board 409 is connected to each of these indicators via a corresponding port. You can operate the lighting and display in.

The slot machine 1 includes a sub-board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409, and the sub-board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (audio). Amplifier) 1126, sound source IC 1128, etc. are mounted. The sub-board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 450, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device, and the operation of the speaker 142.

Further, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the amusement park via the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (input medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. The connection configuration in FIG. 49 is only an example of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also peripheral boards other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510) may be made connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. In such a case, the external board may be connected to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from various boards connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. Specifically, various game information managed by the sub-board 510 and emergency information that can be managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, error information for notifying malfunctions and malfunctions of components of the slot machine 1) are holed. It will be possible to output to the computer 1200.

In addition, the power supply device 112 is provided with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power supply switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1, and can be operated only by opening the door-shaped front member 200. Of these, the power switch 112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. .. Further, the reset switch 112u is for canceling the error generated in the slot machine 1, and is further operated when changing the setting together with the setting key switch 112t. It should be noted that these switches described above may be installed on the main board 409.

The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In the game using the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 129 while the bet number of medals is determined, each reel 70L, 70M, 70R rotates, and then the player has the reel stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R. When, the corresponding reels 70L, 70M, 70R are stopped and controlled, and when all the reels 70L, 70M, 70R are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary. A specified number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination will be awarded accordingly.

[7. Reel design]
Next, a sequence of symbols provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of the three reels 70 of the game unit 3 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an expanded pattern sequence provided on the outer peripheral surface of each reel in the slot machine. As shown in FIG. 50, the outer peripheral surfaces of the three reels 70 in the game unit 3 are provided with a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols having different arrangements. Further, in the present embodiment, one symbol row is composed of 21 symbols.

The symbols used in the symbol row are the "red 7" symbol with the number 7 drawn in red, the "white 7" symbol with the hatchet drawn, and the black "BAR" with the outer shape drawn in a horizontally long rectangular shape. A "cherry" pattern with cherries, a "replay" pattern with a horizontally long oval shape, a "bell" pattern with two bells, and a "bell" pattern with watermelons. There is a "watermelon" symbol and a "blank" symbol with multiple crystals drawn on it. In each symbol row, the same symbols are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other on the upper and lower sides.

Among these symbols, the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are more conspicuous and easier to identify than the other symbols. The ease of identification here means a high degree to which the player can easily identify the symbol including the state where the reel 70 is rotating and the reel 70 is stopped. Further, only one "red 7" symbol is provided in each of the three reels 70 in the sequence number 4. There is only one "red 7" symbol on each reel 70L, 70M, 70R, and in addition, the color (red) is easier to see than other symbols. Only one "white 7" symbol is provided in the arrangement number 17 of the middle reel 70M, and is not provided in the left reel 70L and the right reel 70R. There is only one "BAR" symbol, the left reel 70L array number 11, the middle reel 70M array number 6, and the right reel 70R array number 17, respectively, and in addition, the color (black) is also available. It is easier to see than other symbols. It is easy for the player to set these symbols as the target symbols due to the color and size of the symbols even while the reel is rotating. These symbols are merely symbolic symbols (only one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but by forming a predetermined combination, it becomes a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. .. That is, a predetermined game privilege is given.

One "cherry" symbol is provided on the left reel 70L, and four each on the middle reel 70M and the right reel 70R. Five "replay" symbols are provided on each of the three reels 70. Six "bell" symbols are provided on each of the left reel 70L and the right reel 70R, and five are provided on the middle reel 70M.

Six "watermelon" symbols are provided on the left reel 70L, and three on each of the middle reel 70M and the right reel 70R. A "blank" symbol is provided on each of the three reels 70, one for each.

In the slot machine 1, the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line in the symbol display area is a symbol of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" or "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"blank". At the time of the symbol (BB role symbol), a big bonus (BB) is given as a privilege, and 300 medals are paid out by the BB game. In addition, when all the combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line are "BAR" symbols (RB role symbols), a regular bonus (RB) is given as a privilege, and 20 medals are paid out by the RB game. Furthermore, the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line is the symbol of "Replay"-"BAR"-"Replay, Bell, Watermelon, or Cherry", "Cherry"-"BAR"-" "One of Replay, Bell, Watermelon, and Cherry" symbol, "Replay"-"Bell"-"One of Replay, Bell, Watermelon, and Cherry" symbol, and "Cherry"-"Bell" -When either of the "replay or bell" symbols (cherry role symbol), 1 (weak cherry role) or 9 (strong cherry role) medals are paid out as a privilege.

In addition, the combinations of symbols stopped on the effective line are "bell"-"red 7"-"watermelon or cherry" symbol, "bell"-"cherry"-"watermelon or cherry" symbol, and "bell" from the left. "Blank"-"Watermelon or Cherry" design, "Bell"-"White 7"-"Watermelon or Cherry" design, "BAR or Watermelon"-"Bell or Watermelon"-"Red 7, BAR, and "One of the bells", "BAR or watermelon"-"One of red 7, cherry, blank, and white 7"-"Replay", "Bell"-"Red 7, replay, cherry, blank, And white 7 "-" replay "design," BAR or watermelon "-" replay "-" watermelon or cherry "design," bell "-" bell "-" replay or cherry "design," replay " -"Any of Red 7, Cherry, Blank, and White 7"-"Replay or White 7" symbol, "Replay"-"Replay or Watermelon"-"Replay or Cherry" symbol, "Bell"-" When any of the "watermelon"-"BAR, bell, and white 7" symbols (replay role symbols), a replay is given as a privilege.

In addition, the combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line are "BAR"-"Replay"-"Replay" symbols, "Watermelon"-"Replay"-"Replay" symbols, and "Bell"-"Bell" from the left. -When either of the "bell" symbols (bell role symbol) is used, 9 medals (bell role, correct bell role) will be paid out as a privilege. In addition, the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line is "BAR or watermelon"-"Red 7 or blank"-"Watermelon or cherry" symbol, or "BAR or watermelon"-"Cherry or white 7"- At the time of the "watermelon or cherry" symbol (incorrect bell role symbol), one medal (incorrect answer bell role) is paid out as a privilege.

The bell role includes a push order bell role (left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell) and an ALL role (common bell). What is the push order bell combination? When the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R are operated in the proper push order decided for each (correct answer bell role), the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128M in the proper push order decided for each. , 128R is not operated (incorrect answer bell role), and the number of medals to be paid out is different.

Specifically, the push order of the bell role is the left of "left reel 70L-> middle reel 70M-> right reel 70R" and "left reel 70L-> right reel 70R-> middle reel 70M". Correct answer bell, "Middle reel 70M-> Left reel 70L-> Right reel 70R" and "Middle reel 70M-> Right reel 70R-> Left reel 70L" Medium correct answer bell, "Right reel 70R-> Left reel 70L-> Middle reel 70M" and " There is a right correct answer bell of "right reel 70R-> middle reel 70M-> left reel 70L". Then, when the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R are operated in this proper push order, the bell role symbols are controlled so as to be aligned with the effective line, and nine medals are paid out based on this. Since the bell symbols constituting the bell role symbol are arranged within the range in which the reel pull-in control can be executed, the bell role symbol must be operated as long as the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R are operated in an appropriate push order. Is controlled to align with the effective line.

On the other hand, in the push order of the bell role, when the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R are operated in an improper push order, the bell role symbol is controlled so as not to be aligned on the effective line, and the incorrect answer bell role symbol is used. Is controlled so that it is aligned with the effective line.

Also, when the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line is "bell"-"BAR or cherry"-"watermelon" from the left (watermelon role symbol), 3 (weak watermelon role) or 9 cards as a privilege. Pay out the medal (role of strong watermelon). Further, when the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line is a combination other than the above, the privilege is not given as "missing".

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the symbols are stopped in a specific combination on the effective line in the symbol display area, the privilege corresponding to the combination of the stopped symbols is given to the player. Whether or not the three stop buttons 128 can be operated so that the symbol stops on the effective line in the desired combination, and the symbol can be stopped on the effective line in the desired combination of symbols. Can entertain the player.

[8. Combination of winning combination and design]
Next, a combination of the winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and the corresponding symbols will be described. FIG. 51 is a winning value determination table used for determining whether or not a winning combination is applicable in the flag processing described later.

As described above, each reel 70L, 70M, 70R has a large number of symbols. The order of the symbols and the types of symbols are different for each reel.

Then, it is determined from the display content (symbol combination mode) displayed on the effective line when all the reels 70L, 70M, 70R are stopped, whether or not the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. Will be done. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line in the symbol display area A.

In the following, when the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the valid line, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is referred to as the winning combination symbol) is prepared. Or it is said that the winning combination symbols are complete.

[8-1. Bonus role]
The bonus combination is a combination mode in which the player is given a profit when the regular bonus game is executed, and the combination mode of the red 7 symbols and the combination mode of the BAR symbols correspond to the bonus combination mode. .. As shown in FIG. 51, in this example, the big bonus combination (BB) is won with a probability of 256/65536, and the regular bonus combination (RB) is won with a probability of 16/65536.

Then, when the bonus combination is won, it is permissible that the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the bonus combination (BB bonus combination, RB bonus combination) (hereinafter referred to as BB bonus combination symbol, RB bonus combination symbol) is displayed on the effective line. Then, when the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the BB bonus role is aligned on the effective line, a game privilege called a big bonus game (hereinafter referred to as BB game) is given, and the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the RB bonus combination becomes the effective line. When they are complete, a game privilege called a regular bonus game (hereinafter referred to as RB game) will be given. In the BB game and the RB game, a plurality of games in which medals can be easily obtained are intensively played, and are continuously executed until a predetermined number of games are executed or a predetermined number of medals are paid out. When the number of medals paid out reaches the specified number (or even if the number exceeds the specified number), the BB game and the RB game are terminated.

Even if the bonus combination symbols (BB bonus combination symbol, RB bonus combination symbol) are prepared, no medal is given in the game, and the game only serves as an opportunity to shift to the bonus game.

Further, instead of the real bonus role such as the above-mentioned bonus role, a game such as an ART game which is advantageous to the player may be regarded as a bonus game.

[8-2. Replay]
As a combination mode of the symbol corresponding to the replay role (replay role symbol), "bell"-"red 7"-"watermelon or cherry" symbol, "bell"-"cherry"-"watermelon or cherry" symbol, ""Bell"-"Blank"-"Watermelon or Cherry" design, "Bell"-"White 7"-"Watermelon or Cherry" design, "BAR or Watermelon"-"Bell or Watermelon"-"Red 7, BAR, And one of the bells, "BAR or watermelon"-"one of red 7, cherry, blank, and white 7"-"replay", "bell"-"red 7, replay, cherry, blank" , And white 7 "-" replay "design," BAR or watermelon "-" replay "-" watermelon or cherry "design," bell "-" bell "-" replay or cherry "design,""Replay"-"Red 7, Cherry, Blank, and White 7"-"Replay or White 7" symbol, "Replay"-"Replay or Watermelon"-"Replay or Cherry" symbol, "Bell"- The design of "watermelon"-"any of BAR, bell, and white 7" is predetermined. Further, as shown in FIG. 51, in this example, three types of replay combinations are provided: (normal) replay, hatchet replay, and hatchet fall replay. The "machete replay" is a replay role that can be won only during the ART game, and is a winning role that causes promotion to a super ART game (SART game) having a higher advantage than the ART game. In addition, the "machete fall replay" is a replay role that can be won only by SART, and is a winning role that causes a fall from a SART game to an ART game.

When any combination of the above replay combination symbols is aligned on the effective line, a game privilege called a replay game is given. In this replay game, the game to be played as the next game can be executed as a replay without inserting medals or betting operations again.

Further, even when the above-mentioned replay role symbols are aligned on the effective line, no medal is given, which serves as an opportunity to shift to the replay game. The feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to consume (hang a new medal) a new medal in the next game instead of paying out the medal. In addition, since the replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, it can be said that even if the winning frequency increases, for example, by increasing the winning probability, there is very little disadvantage to the hall. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, the probability of winning is approximately once every seven times. This makes it possible to keep the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) within a certain range. In other words, it is possible to give the winning role of replay a role of suppressing the consumption of excessive medals in the progress of the game.

In addition, each reel 70L, 70M, 70R has a replay role symbol within the sliding range of the reels 70L, 70M, 70R (for example, within 4 symbols) from the stop operation of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R to the actual stop operation. The symbols constituting the combination mode of the replay combination symbols are evenly arranged so that the combination mode of the above can be displayed (for example, other reels 70L, 70M, 70R arranged between the replay symbols and the replay symbols. The number of symbols (designs other than replay symbols) is from 2 to a maximum of 4), which makes it possible to align the replay role symbols without the need for a push.

[8-3. Bell]
The combinations of the symbols corresponding to the bell role (bell role symbol) are "BAR"-"replay"-"replay", "watermelon"-"replay"-"replay", and "bell"-"bell". "-" Bell "design," BAR or watermelon "-" Red 7 or blank "-" Watermelon or cherry "design, and" BAR or watermelon "-" Cherry or white 7 "-" Watermelon or cherry " It has been decided.

When the bell role symbols are aligned on the valid line, a specified number of medals (for example, 9) are paid out. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. In other words, when the bell symbols are aligned, the game privilege of paying out 9 medals is given. Therefore, it can be said that the bell is a winning role that can be expected to increase the number of medals and suppress the consumption of medals in advancing the game. However, the winning probability of the bell in the normal game state is suppressed to be lower than that of the replay. Similar to the above-mentioned replay combination symbols, the bell symbols are evenly arranged on the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R so that they can be aligned without the need for pressing.

In the push-order bell combination, as long as the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R are operated in an appropriate push order, the correct bell combination symbols are always controlled to be aligned with the effective line. However, if the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R are operated in an improper push order, the correct bell role symbols are controlled not to be aligned with the valid line, and the incorrect bell role symbols are aligned with the valid line. Tolerate. Therefore, if you win the bell role, you can get 9 medals by operating the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R in the proper push order, but stop in the improper push order. When the buttons 128L, 128M, 128R are operated, there is a symbol combination in which only one medal is paid out (1 bell spilled eye) or a lost symbol combination in which no medal is paid out (0 bell spilled eye). Displayed on the valid line.

The ALL role (common bell) of the bell role is controlled so that the correct bell role symbol is aligned with the effective line regardless of the push order of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R, and is based on this. Nine medals will be paid out. As described above, the bell symbols that make up the correct bell role symbol are arranged within the range in which the reel pull-in control can be executed, so the correct bell role symbol is always an effective line for the ALL role (common bell) of the bell role. It is controlled to be aligned with. In this example, the winning price judgment table described later is configured so that the push order bell role is won with a high probability (probability of about 1/6.5), and the normal state (bonus game and ART game are not executed). In the state), the theoretical probability of winning a medal even if you win the push order bell role is 1/6, whereas in the ART game, the push order bell role (left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer) If you win the bell), you can get medals with 100% probability by notifying (navigating) the player of the proper pressing order of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R in advance, so a lot of medals compared to the normal state. (In this example, the net increase in the number of medals per game in the ART game is about 2.7), which is advantageous for the player.

In the winning price determination table during the above BB game, the ALL role of the bell role is set as the winning combination, and in this example, when the correct answer bell role symbols are aligned 33 times, that is, more than 297 medals are paid out. If so, the BB game ends. Also, during the RB game, the ALL role of the bell role is set as the winning combination in the winning price judgment table, and in this example, when the correct answer bell role symbols are aligned three times, that is, more than 27 medals are paid out. If so, the RB game ends. In this way, during the bonus game, by making it easy to align the correct bell role symbols, it is possible to concentrate and execute a plurality of games in which medals can be easily obtained. In addition, in order to start each game in the bonus game, it is necessary to insert 3 medals or 3 bets, and since each game always has the correct bell role pattern, the net increase in the number of BB games is 198. The net increase in the number of cards in the RB game is 18.

[8-4. watermelon]
As a combination mode of the symbol corresponding to the watermelon role (watermelon role symbol), the symbol of "bell"-"BAR or cherry"-"watermelon" is predetermined. Further, as shown in FIG. 51, in this example, two types of watermelons, a weak watermelon and a strong watermelon, are provided as watermelon roles.

Of the above two types of watermelon roles, the weak watermelon allows the combination of "bell"-"BAR"-"watermelon" to be displayed on the effective line as the weak watermelon role symbol, and the strong watermelon is strong. It is allowed that the combination mode of "bell"-"cherry"-"watermelon" is displayed on the effective line as the watermelon role symbol. When either the weak watermelon role symbol or the strong watermelon role symbol is displayed on the effective line, the combination mode of "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is displayed on the line other than the effective line. It has become.

When the weak watermelon role symbols are aligned on the effective line, the specified number of medals (3 in this example) are paid out, and when the strong watermelon role symbols are aligned on the effective line, the specified number of medals (9 in this example) are paid out. Is paid out. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. That is, when the weak watermelon symbols are aligned, the game privilege of paying out 3 medals is given, and when the strong watermelon symbols are aligned, the game privilege of paying out 9 medals is granted. Therefore, it can be said that the watermelon is a winning role that can be expected to increase the number of medals and suppress the consumption of medals in advancing the game. In addition, the probability of winning a watermelon in a normal game state is kept lower than that of a replay or a bell. Regarding the watermelon symbol, unlike the above-mentioned replay role symbol and bell role symbol, the reels 70L from the stop operation of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R to the actual stop in each reel 70L, 70M, 70R, It is arranged outside the sliding range of 70M and 70R (for example, within 4 symbols), and it is necessary to press the watermelon in order to align the symbols, and if the pressing is insufficient, it may be missed.
[8-5. Cherry]
For the symbol corresponding to the cherry role (cherry symbol), the combination of the symbols stopped in the symbol display area is one cherry symbol (in this example, the left), such as "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol". If it is only the reel 70L), it is considered that the cherry pattern is complete. The "ANY symbol" here means that any symbol may be used. Further, as shown in FIG. 51, in this example, two types of cherry role, weak cherry and strong cherry, are provided.

Of the above two types of cherry roles, the weak cherry is the weak cherry role symbol, "Replay"-"BAR"-"One of replay, bell, watermelon, and cherry", and "Cherry"-"BAR". -It allows the combination of "replay, bell, watermelon, and cherry" symbols to be displayed on the valid line, and the strong cherry is "replay" as the strong cherry role symbol. The combination of "bell"-"replay, bell, watermelon, and cherry" and "cherry"-"bell"-"replay or bell" shall be displayed on the valid line. Is tolerated. When the weak cherry combination symbol is displayed on the effective line, the combination mode of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol excluding cherry symbol-ANY symbol including cherry symbol" is displayed on the effective line or a line other than the effective line. , When the strong cherry role symbol is displayed on the effective line, the combination mode of "cherry symbol-cherry symbol-ANY symbol including cherry symbol" is displayed on the effective line or a line other than the effective line. ..

Then, when the weak cherry symbols are aligned, the specified number of medals (1 in this example) is paid out in the game, and when the strong cherry symbols are aligned, the specified number (9 in this example) is paid out. The medal will be paid out. That is, when the weak cherry symbols are aligned, the game privilege of paying out one medal is given, and when the strong cherry symbols are aligned, the game privilege of paying out nine medals is granted.

Therefore, the cherry symbols are not determined to be aligned according to the combination mode of the symbols when all reels are stopped, but only for at least one reel, the symbols displayed on the effective line when the reels are stopped. It can be said that it is determined that the reels are aligned. However, medals will be paid out after all reels are stopped. As for the cherry symbol, since only one is arranged on the left reel 70L, the stop button 128L cannot be aligned unless the stop button 128L is stopped (pressed) within the range where the cherry symbol can be pulled in. There is.

Since the above bells, watermelons, and cherries are all winning roles corresponding to the game privilege of paying out medals, they are collectively referred to as "small roles" below as necessary.

In the above description, the bell, the watermelon, and the cherry are described as small roles, but in addition to these, further small roles can be provided. For example, a different type of symbol (for example, a plum symbol) from the bell symbol, watermelon symbol, and cherry symbol may be provided, and the corresponding number of medals to be paid out (specified number) may be different to distinguish it from the above-mentioned small winning combination. Alternatively, it is possible to reduce the number of symbols arranged on the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R to give a difficulty level as a winning combination symbol that needs to be pressed.

[8-7. Lost]
If the combination mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the valid line does not correspond to any of the winning combinations, it is a loss. In addition, medals are not awarded in the game that has been lost. For winning roles other than bonus roles such as small roles, if they are not aligned in the winning game, the game result will be lost. In other words, even though you have won a small winning combination (for example, watermelon) that cannot be aligned unless you press the button, if the symbol combination mode corresponding to the small winning combination is not displayed on the valid line, it will be lost and the next Winning results will not be carried over after the game. However, if the bonus combination is won, the winning result will be carried over to the next game or later even if the winning game is not aligned (the bonus symbols can be aligned after the next game).

The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination. By setting the symbol combination mode corresponding to each winning combination as a heterogeneous symbol combination mode, the different symbol combination mode (so-called disparity) is displayed on the effective line, but the same type symbol combination mode is displayed on the line other than the effective line. May be displayed so that the winning combination can be easily grasped by appearance.

[9. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds according to the processing procedure on the control program executed on the main control board 21 (mainly the CPU or the like). The main control board 21 (CPU) stores and holds information on the progress of the game (progress of game processing) as backup data when the power is cut off (including the case where a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs).

FIG. 52 shows the basic processing procedure of one game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial settings for preparing for the start of the game are executed. Especially when the power is turned on, the connection and operation status of the various devices mentioned above are confirmed, the presence or absence of backup data is confirmed, and if the backup data exists, the process is restored to the state before the power was turned off. To execute. If the backup data does not exist, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 123, or by pressing the MAX insertion button 125 (or one insertion button 130) if there are already stored medals. Then, the start lever 129 is in a state of waiting for operation. That is, the BET process is executed until the number of bets on one game is determined and the start lever 129 can be operated. If the slot machine 1 is a three-card dedicated machine capable of executing a game by inserting three medals, the one-insertion button 130 may not be provided.

In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 129 that has been in the operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process for determining whether or not any of the winning combinations is the result of the internal lottery is performed. Execute. This internal lottery process is any one of the stages before all the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R that start rotation in the subsequent step S4 are in the stopped state (the state is stopped by the player's stop operation). It is executed to determine whether or not the winning combination of the game is the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any of the winning combinations, when the reels 70L, 70M, 70R are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the effective line. It is permissible to stop.

Next, in step S31, an instruction function process is performed as a process related to the ART instruction function (so-called ART navigation). In the instruction function processing, not only the winning of the ART game and the start thereof are determined, but also the ART navigation that teaches the player the push order and the like during the ART game is executed. The details of the instruction function processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 and the like.

In the instruction function processing of this example, the main board 409 manages all the central controls related to the ART function (ART first hit lottery, determination of the number of ART games, execution of the ART game, transition of the game state, display of the instruction function, etc.). do. On the other hand, auxiliary control related to the ART function (navigation display on the liquid crystal display device 450, etc.) shall be managed by the sub-board 510, but even in such a case, the sub-board 510 causes the liquid crystal display device 450 or the like to display the navigation. The display content of the display is limited to that according to the determination result of the instruction function by the main board 409 (content that is not different from the instruction function display). In the slot machine 1, the instruction content by the instruction function (which may be read as the display content of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. Further, the display content of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409 and displayed on the special display LED 612 and the display content of the navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 450 or the like are paired. The correspondence is not limited to one, and may be a one-to-n (plurality of patterns) correspondence. That is, when some instruction function display is performed by the main board 409 on the special display LED 612, the sub board 510 causes the navigation display on the liquid crystal display device 450 or the like to execute the navigation display in the display mode corresponding to the instruction function display. , The specific display mode of the navigation display does not have to be limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any one of a plurality of types of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. good. In such a case, the sub-board 510 may determine which display mode is used for the navigation display, or the main board 409 may specify. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, the main board 409 may perform all the processing related to the instruction function processing.

Further, in the instruction function process of step S31 shown in this example, the processing content related to the instruction function of ART is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. Here, since the internal lottery process is performed each time the game is executed, the ART first hit lottery performed based on the result of the internal lottery process is also performed each time the game is executed. Further, it is preferable that the instruction function process is completed before the reel rotation process of step S4 described in the next stage is started.

Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting the rotation of all the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation process, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R is enabled when the rotation of all the reels 70L, 70M, 70R is started, and the reel stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R are enabled. The operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying the fact is turned on, and the timer count until the next reel rotation process is executed is started. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each reel stop button 128L, 128M, 128R, respectively.

In step S5, the player presses the reel stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R, and the operation valid lamp is turned off in the order of acceptance, and the reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 70L, 70M, 70R. To execute.

In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that all the lines 301a to 301c are in the stopped state, whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on the "valid line" (the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations). Based on whether the combination mode is displayed), a determination process for determining the winning combination is executed. Specifically, by collating "display contents displayed on the effective line (symbol combination mode)" and "symbol combination that is allowed to stop on the effective line corresponding to the winning combination". Determine the winning combination. Further, the determination process in step S6 may be determined based only on the "display content displayed on the valid line (combination mode of symbols)". In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, only the lower row (lower row line) is used as an effective line, but the position and number of effective lines are not limited to this. Regarding the first hit lottery and the additional lottery of the ART game, the winning or losing is not determined only by the symbol combination shown only on the reel 70, but the display of the symbol displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 711 (described later). ) And the symbol displayed when the reel 70 is stopped.

In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. Further, when the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination accompanied by a change in the game state as in the case of the 2nd type BB, various game benefits are given by changing the game state, replaying, or the like.

The above is the basic processing procedure of one game of the slot machine 1. Here, in steps S2 (BET processing) to S4 (reel rotation processing), internal processing is performed triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, a specific description of this starting process will be given.

[9-1. Start process]
FIG. 53 specifically shows each process performed in the start process.

In the start processing, first, in step S101, the insertion of a medal or the operation of the bet buttons 125 and 126 is awaited. When the bet button operation or the medal insertion is performed, the determination in step S101 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S102.

In the next step S102, as the reception process, the number of bets (only MAX bets in this example) is determined, and the effective line lamp is turned on.

In step S103, the operation of the starting lever 129 is enabled. When the operation of the start lever 129 is enabled, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 129 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the starting lever 129 is enabled, and in that case, whether the operation of the starting lever 129 is accepted. When the operation of the start lever 129 is enabled in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 129 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 until the player does not perform a bet operation or insert a medal in step S101 or reaches a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

Also, the replay game does not require a new medal bet. This automatically puts the MAX bet state into the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. As a result, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

In step S105, the operation of the starting lever 129 is invalidated in response to the operation of the starting lever 129 in step S104.

Next, in step S106, when the start lever 129 is operated, random numbers are extracted with this as an opportunity. After extracting the random numbers, the process proceeds to the next step S107. Regarding the timing of extracting random numbers at this time, set an appropriate extraction timing in the process of programming, such as performing it immediately after operating the start lever 129 or after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds later). Can be done.

In step S107, as a flag process, it is determined from the extracted random number values (hereinafter referred to as extracted random number values) which winning combination is applicable (collation of random number values). In this determination, the extracted random number values are collated in the hit value determination table. The collation of the random number value performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches, matches) with the predetermined random number value of the winning combination. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the winning combinations, the flag corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is set to ON (= 1). The flag corresponding to the winning combination that is turned ON (= 1) at this time is referred to as the winning combination winning flag.

Then, in the flag processing, when the hit value determination table that is the reference of the determination is determined when the extracted random value is collated in the game, the RB game flag indicating that the RB game is in progress or the BB game. The winning price determination table in the game is determined with reference to the game status flag such as the BB in-game flag indicating that the game is in. That is, the hit value determination table corresponding to the game state flag that is in the ON (= 1) state in the game is set and the extracted random number values are collated. The game status flags include the RB in-game flag, the BB in-game flag, and the normal in-game flag. When both the RB game flag and the BB game flag are in the OFF (= 0) state, the normal game flag is always set to the ON (= 1) state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes a "loss" that does not correspond to any winning combination, and the loss flag is turned ON. Here, the winning flag or the loss flag (collectively referred to as the establishment flag) means that it is possible to align the winning combination symbols corresponding to the establishment flag only when the corresponding establishment flag is ON. It will be. Therefore, if the loss flag corresponds to the establishment flag, none of the winning combination symbols can be aligned. It can also be said that the above steps S106 and S107 perform a random number lottery inside the slot machine 1, and in the following, these steps are collectively referred to as an internal lottery or an internal lottery. The process from the extraction of the random number to the flag processing corresponds to the internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 52 described above).

In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has timed up (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called the wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. It is a thing. Here, when the wait timer has timed up (4.1 seconds have already passed), this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S109. In addition, this determination loops until the wait timer times out.

In step S109, the rotation of all reels 70L, 70M, 70R is started. Then, when the rotation speeds of all the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R become constant, the operation valid lamps of the respective stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the push operation of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R has been enabled.

In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to rotate at the above-mentioned constant speed until the stop operation (pressing operation of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R) by the player is accepted.

Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[9-2. Game state transition control process]
FIG. 54 is an example of a block diagram showing a transition of the gaming state. The game state transition control is executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

When the data value in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 is cleared (RAM cleared), the general state (non-RT) is set. The replay synthesis probability in the general state (maintenance replay role, up replay role 1, up replay role 2, down replay role, 7-match replay role, and 7-match fake play role) is about 1/3. .. In such a general state, when the game is executed for a certain period of time, the number of medals that the player bets to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within this certain period of time. .. That is, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game. In FIG. 54, the replay synthesis probability is referred to as the RP synthesis probability.

In the general state, even though any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is not stopped in the proper order and the 0 bell is not operated. When the zero is displayed on the valid line, the CPU 1110 controls the game state to shift from the general state to the RT1. The replay synthesis probability at RT1 is about 1 / 7.3 for non-RT. In such RT1, when the game is executed for a certain period of time, the number of medals that the player bets to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game, as in the general state, within this fixed period. There will be more.

In RT1, when "raise lip 1 + maintenance lip" is selected by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of raise lip 1 is displayed on the valid line, the CPU 1110 shifts the game state from RT1 to RT2. Control to be done. When the game state is changed from RT1 to RT2, the basic ART game is started and the basic ART is in progress. In this specification, the generic term for games in the basic ART, in the special zone described later, and in the preparation of the special zone is referred to as an ART game. However, if the game shifts from RT1 to RT2 without winning the ART first hit lottery, the basic ART game is not performed, and the instruction function display described later and the lottery with the number of ART games added are not performed.

During the ART game, the ART game by the ART function is executed. Specifically, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the CPU 1110 controls so that the instruction function display described later is performed. It is also controlled by the sub-board 510 so that the display according to the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 is performed. Moreover, the replay synthesis probability in RT2 is about 1 / 1.6. In such RT2, when the game is executed for a certain period of time, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is larger than the number of medals bet by the player to execute the game within this fixed period. That is, in RT2 where the instruction function display is performed, when the player executes the game, the number of medals increases accordingly. However, the ART game ends in 100 games unless the lottery for adding the number of ART games described later is won. Specifically, if the lottery for adding the number of ART games is not won, the instruction function display described later is performed from the start of the basic ART game until 100 games are digested, but when 100 games are digested, an instruction is given. The function display ends. At the same time, the display by the sub-board 510 according to the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 is also completed. That is, even if any one of "push-order bell 1" to "push-order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 is not specified. Then, when the bell zero is displayed on the effective line, the CPU 1110 controls so that the gaming state is shifted from RT2 to RT1. Even if the basic ART game is over, RT2 is maintained until the bell zero is displayed on the valid line, so the right to execute the replay game is given frequently, but the instruction function is displayed. It will not be.

In this example, the number of games in which the ART game continues until the specified number of games such as 100 games is exhausted is managed, but instead of this, until the specified number of medals such as 100 net increase is net increased. The number of sheets that the ART game continues may be managed.

During the basic ART, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 128 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display. Therefore, as long as the reel stop button 128 is operated according to this instruction function display, the gaming state is maintained at RT2 (however, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raised lip 2 is displayed, the game shifts to RT3). However, even though one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" was selected by the internal lottery and the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 128 was clearly indicated by the instruction function display. When the reel stop button 128 is not operated according to this instruction function display, the bell zero is displayed on the effective line, and the gaming state is shifted from RT2 to RT1 by the control of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

In RT2, when "raise lip 2 + maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the raise replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, the game state is controlled to be transferred to RT3. When the game state is changed from RT2 to RT3, it will be in the special zone and the ART game will be added with high probability (details will be described later). Also in this RT3, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 displays the instruction function described later. Control to be done. It is also controlled by the sub-board 510 so that the display according to the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 is performed.

The special zone ends in 5 games. Specifically, when "lower rip + maintenance rip" is selected in the internal lottery, if it is in the special zone (if 5 games have not been digested), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay role is displayed. It is controlled so that the instruction function display described later is performed so as to be performed. On the other hand, when "Lower Lip + Maintenance Lip" is selected in the internal lottery, if 5 games have been digested since the special zone started, the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay role will be displayed. , Control so that the instruction function display described later is performed. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed, the CPU 1110 controls so that the gaming state is shifted from RT3 to RT2. Further, when the bell zero is displayed on the effective line in RT3, the CPU 1110 controls so that the gaming state is shifted from RT3 to RT1. The replay synthesis probability at RT3 is about 1 / 1.6. If 5 games have been digested since the special zone was started but the symbol combination corresponding to the lowered replay combination is not yet displayed, the game is controlled to the basic ART game under the gaming state of RT3. The lottery state during ART at this time is a high probability state. Therefore, even during the special zone or the special zone preparation, the reel stop button is displayed when any of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery as in the basic ART. The proper stop operation order of 128 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display, and as long as the reel stop button 128 is operated according to this instruction function display, the game state will be maintained at RT3, but the reel does not follow the instruction function display. When the stop button 128 is operated and the bell zero is displayed on the valid line, it will be transferred to RT1.

In any of the general states, RT1, RT2 and RT3, when the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated (when the bonus is established), the bonus is inside. Inside the bonus is a state in which the bonus flag is established but the bonus game has not started yet. That is, when the bonus combination is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated, but in the condition device corresponding to this bonus combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is effective in the game in which the internal lottery is won. Even if it is not displayed in, it will continue to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line after the next game. The replay synthesis probability inside the bonus is about 1 / 7.3. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus symbol is displayed on the valid line (when the bonus is won) inside the bonus, the bonus game is started and the bonus is in progress. During such a bonus, when the game is run for a period of time, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is greater than the number of medals the player bets to play the game within this period. .. Then, when the bonus game is over, it returns to the general state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 controls the game state to any one of the general state (non-RT state), RT1 state, RT2 state, RT3 state, bonus internal state, and bonus state. Will be done. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has an ART function, and the execution of the ART game by the ART function is basically controlled by a system different from the control of such a gaming state. To. As described above, the ART game by such an ART function is mainly executed in RT2 and RT3, but if the execution condition of the ART game is satisfied (for example, winning the ART first hit lottery), in any gaming state. Can also run ART games. However, this does not apply if the restrictions such as rules are violated. For example, it is assumed that the ART game cannot be executed in the bonus state.

[9-3. Reel stop processing]
When the start processing is completed, the machine is in a state of waiting for an operation for stopping the reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, push operation of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R). FIG. 56 shows the content of the reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, the reel stop control table is selected according to the internal lottery flag indicating the result of the internal lottery in the game. In this reel stop control table, patterns are prepared in advance for all internal lottery flags, and these are stored in a control ROM in which programs and data used for control on the main control board 21 are stored in advance as read-only table data. Has been done.

When the reel stop control table is selected based on the internal lottery flag in step S201 above, the reel stop control table is in a standby state until the push operation of each stop button 128L, 128M, 128R is accepted (steps S202, S210, S217). ). In these standby states, whether or not each reel of the left reel 70L, the middle reel 70M, and the right reel 70R has already stopped, or the state where the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF). It is also determined whether or not the state) is satisfied, and also whether or not any of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, and 128R is pressed. Until all the push buttons 128L, 128M, and 128R are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes after step S202 are repeated.

Here, the order in which the push buttons 128L, 128M, and 128R are accepted (stop operation procedure) is also referred to as a stop operation procedure (or push order) called "forward push", "reverse push", and "middle push", respectively. ).

The above-mentioned "forward push" stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 70La first (that is, a procedure for pressing the left stop button 128L first), and is the second. Depending on the operation order of the reels to be stopped thereafter, it can be further divided into two stop operation procedures of [left reel → middle reel → right reel] or [left reel → right reel → middle reel]. These two are collectively called "forward push". The latter stop operation procedure may also be referred to as "pushing forward scissors".

The above-mentioned "reverse push" stop operation procedure is the operation procedure for stopping the right reel 70R first (that is, the procedure for pressing the right stop button 128R first), which is the opposite of the "forward push". This means that the reels to be stopped from the second onward are further divided into two stop operation procedures: [right reel → middle reel → left reel] or [right reel → left reel → middle reel]. Will be. These two are collectively called "reverse push". The latter stop operation procedure may also be referred to as "reverse scissors pushing".

The above-mentioned "middle push" stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for first stopping the middle reel 70M (that is, a procedure for first pressing the middle stop button 128M), and the second and subsequent steps. Depending on the operation order of the reels to be stopped, it can be further divided into two stop operation procedures: [middle reel → left reel → right reel] or [middle reel → right reel → left reel]. These two are collectively called "middle push".

In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 70L is in the stopped state (left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0) and the pressing operation of the left stop button 128L is accepted. .. Assuming that the left stop button 128L is pressed first (first) according to the stop operation procedure of "forward push" from the standby state of the push operation of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R in step S201, the determination in step S202. Is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The "first reel" here means the reel for which the stop operation is first accepted or the reel is stopped first. In this example (“forward push”), the stop operation of the left reel 70L is first accepted, so that the first reel stop flag is in the OFF state (F = 0). Therefore, the determination in step S203 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S204.

In the next step S204, the first reel stop processing is performed on the left reel 70L. In this first reel stop processing, the stop position of the winning combination symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is controlled based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag.

In step S206, the reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 70M and right reel 70R is determined. As described above, since the slot machine 1 has only one effective line, the number of stop control tables for the remaining reels (middle reel 70M, right reel 70R) can be determined to be one at this point. That is, if the symbol on the effective line on the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 70L) is a symbol that may be a winning combination symbol, the remaining reels (middle reel 70M, right reel) are on the effective line. A reel stop control table capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols of 70R) will be selected. As a result, the winning combination symbols other than the BB symbol and the RB symbol can be aligned without the need for a push.

In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to the next step S208.

Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Then, in step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R are in the stopped state. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF is only turned ON, and the middle reel 70M and the right reel 70R are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202 and the subsequent processes are repeated. Execute.

Then, when the processing after step S202 is executed again, the determination of step S202 is not satisfied because the left reel 70L is already in the stopped state, and the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the middle reel 70M is in the stopped state (middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the middle stop button 128M is accepted. .. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of "forward push", the push operation of the middle stop button 128M is accepted. Therefore, the determination in step S210 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S211.

In step S211 it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203 described above. Since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1) at this point, this determination is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning combination symbol is executed based on the reel control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). .. At this time, the middle reel 70M becomes the second reel (second reel) to stop, steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, the process moves to step S216, and the middle reel stop flag MF is turned ON (MF = 1). To step S209.

Then, in step S209 again, only the left reel 70L and the middle reel 70M are in the stopped state, and the right reel 70R is still rotating and is in the stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Since there is no such determination, this determination is not satisfied, the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processes are repeatedly executed.

Further, in the processing after the third step S202, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right stop button 128R is accepted. However, since the subsequent processes of steps S218, S220 and the like are the same as the processes after the above steps S210 (steps S211 and S213), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R are in the stopped state at this point, this determination is satisfied and the reel stop process is completed.

In the case of the stop operation procedure of "middle push", the same explanation as above can be performed, so the details will be omitted. However, in the case of the stop operation procedure of "reverse push", there are some differences from the above explanation, so it will be described below.

The "reverse push" stop operation procedure differs from the above "forward push" or "middle push" stop operation procedure in step S221 (determining the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). be. That is, in the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, only the right reel 70R is in the stopped state. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any effective line may be prepared and one of them may be selected.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of conditional devices are operated as a result of a lottery for one game, the operation mode (stop operation is performed) of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R among the plurality of conditional devices. The reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combination related to the predetermined condition device is drawn into the effective line for each (timing and order of stop operation). That is, if the satisfied condition devices are the same, the same symbol combination is stopped at the effective line as long as the operation modes of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, and 128R are the same. Further, when the lottery result of one game is lost, the reel stop control is performed so that the combination of the lost symbols predetermined for each operation mode of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, 128R is drawn into the effective line. That is, if the lottery result is lost, the same lost symbol combination is stopped at the effective line as long as the operation modes of the stop buttons 128L, 128M, and 128R are the same.

Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R are in the stopped state at this point, this determination is satisfied and the reel stop process is completed.

[9-4. Reel stop control]
In the above reel stop processing, reel stop control is performed to pull the winning winning combination symbol (corresponding winning winning combination symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag to the effective line as much as possible (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when the player's reel stop operation is accepted, the range that can be stopped at the effective line (the range that can draw in the corresponding winning combination symbol, for example, four symbols) is set. If it is decided in advance and there is a corresponding winning combination symbol within the range, the control of pulling it into the effective line and stopping the reel is executed. The "retractable range" here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the direction of rotation of the reel from the time the reel stop operation is received until the reel stops. say. For example, if the pull-in range is set to a maximum of four symbols, when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, the reel can be further rotated and moved up to four symbols from the position as a base point.

Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning combination symbol on the effective line at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, if the corresponding winning combination symbol is within the pull-in range. , It is possible to move the corresponding winning combination symbol to the effective line and then stop it. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player presses the winning combination symbol a little earlier, if the winning combination symbol is within the pull-in possible range, the winning combination symbol is used as an effective line. Can be pulled in and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of omission (the game privilege is extinguished because the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination cannot be obtained because the winning combination symbols cannot be aligned).

Specifically, a reel stop control data table is provided according to the winning combination, and the reel stop control data table corresponds to each sequence number of the left reel 70L, the middle reel 70M, and the right reel 70R, and this sequence number. The number of slips (the number of symbols to be pulled in) is set. Then, when the stop button 128 is operated, the main control board 21 has the stop-operated reel 70 (the reel 70 corresponding to the operated stop button 128 among the left reel 70L, the middle reel 70M, and the right reel 70R). With reference to the table corresponding to the winning combination and the winning combination, the reel 70 is controlled to be stopped by the number of slips associated with the symbol (array number) on the effective line of the reel 70 that has been stopped.

The above is an example of reel stop processing by the table method. Aside from this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this as well, a specific description thereof will be omitted here. Further, in the present embodiment, either the control method or the table method reel stop processing may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be appropriately determined when constructing the control program.

Then, when the reel stop process is completed, it is determined whether or not the winning combination symbols are aligned on the effective line (whether or not the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is displayed). When the winning combination symbols are aligned on the valid line, a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the payout unit 30, and the number of medals paid out is displayed on a payout display (not shown) of the middle unit 5.

[10. Promotion from ART game to SART game]
As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this example, when the winning combination becomes a hatchet replay during the ART game, the transition control is performed to a super ART game (SART game) which is more advantageous than the ART game. Also, at this time, a special promotion effect is executed. This promotion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a front view of the slot machine 1 in a state where the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R of the horizontal movable effect unit 700 are lowered to the front side of the symbol display area A while being horizontally extended. Is.

When the flag processing (step S107) is executed based on the operation of the start lever 129 during the ART game, the winning value determination table in the ART game shown in FIG. 51 is compared with the extracted winning value determination random number. When the winning combination becomes "table replay", the rotation of the reel 70 is started, and the pair of horizontal elevating drive motors 757 of the horizontal movable effect unit 700 is rotated in a predetermined direction to extend the pair horizontally. The sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are moved downward from the positions on both the left and right sides of the central movable decorative unit 550 of the central movable effect unit 500 (the position on the front surface of the base cover 520).

As shown in FIG. 57, a pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R cover the front surfaces of the upper and middle stages of the left reel 70L and the right reel 70R among the three reels 70 arranged side by side. It has moved to the lowest position, and in this state, only the three symbols in the lower row of the symbol display area A and the middle reel 70M can be clearly seen.

Further, when the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R move to the lowest position on the front side of the reel 79, the movement of the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R is stopped. Then, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are displayed with the "white 7" symbol, respectively, and the player is instructed to operate the right stop button 128R in order to stop the right reel 70R. The voice output of "Right!", The display instructing the operation of the right stop button 128R on the main liquid crystal display device 450, etc.) are performed.

Further, the "white 7" symbol displayed on each of the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R is displayed so as to correspond to the middle stage of the left and right reels 70R and 70L, and apparently the middle stage line. The "White 7" symbol has stopped on the left and right reels 70R and 70L.

Then, when the right reel 70R is stopped based on the player operating the right stop button 128R, a display instructing the player to operate the middle stop button 128M to stop the middle reel 70M, etc. (“Middle”). ! ”Voice output, display instructing the operation of the middle stop button 128M on the main liquid crystal display device 450, etc.). At this time, a display instructing the player to operate the middle stop button 128M in order to aim the "white 7" symbol in the middle of the middle reel 70M ("medium!" Audio output or the main liquid crystal display device 450. When the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle of the middle reel 70M by performing a display instructing the operation of the middle stop button 128M, the "white 7" symbol provided on the middle reel 70M and a pair of subs are displayed. The "white 7" symbol displayed on the left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, respectively, causes the "white 7" symbol to be formed on the middle line.

Further, when the middle reel 70M is stopped based on the player operating the middle stop button 128M, a display instructing the player to operate the left stop button 128L to stop the left reel 70L, etc. (“left”). ! ”Voice output, display instructing the operation of the left stop button 128L on the main liquid crystal display device 450, etc.).

Then, if all the reels are stopped based on the operation of all the stop buttons 128 and the doublet of the "white 7" symbol is formed on the middle line, the "white 7" symbols are aligned. And display notifying that the game will be promoted from the ART game to the super ART game (SART game). In this example, when all the reels are stopped based on the operation of all the stop buttons 128, even when the Zoro eyes of the "white 7" pattern are not formed on the middle line, the ART game to the super ART game ( In order to promote to a SART game), a display or the like notifying that the ART game is promoted to a super ART game (SART game) is displayed in this case as well. If all the reels are stopped based on the operation of all the stop buttons 128 and the Zoro eyes of the "white 7" pattern are not formed on the middle line, the ART game is once changed to the super ART game (SART game). ) May be notified that the game will be promoted from the ART game to the super ART game (SART game) by a revival effect or the like.

In addition, when the winning combination is hatchet replay during the ART game and all reels are stopped based on the operation of all stop buttons 128, "machete replay" is displayed on the lower line, which is an effective line. The combination mode of the replay combination symbols corresponding to the winning combination of is in a state of being prepared.

Further, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are located at the lowest position of the three reels 70 arranged side by side so as to cover the front surfaces of the upper and middle stages of the left reel 70L and the right reel 70R. In order to display the "white 7" symbol, in the left reel 70L, the image displayed on the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L (in this example, the "white 7" symbol) and the symbol provided on the left reel 70L are stopped. The left reel 70L (the symbol row of the left reel 70L) is configured by the symbols displayed in the lower row, and in the right reel 70R, the image displayed on the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R (in this example, the "white 7" symbol). The right reel 70R (the symbol row of the right reel 70R) is configured by the symbols provided on the right reel 70R and the symbols displayed in the lower row in the stopped state.

Further, when the super ART game (SART game) is started and the start lever 129 is operated after notifying that the ART game is promoted to the super ART game (SART game), a pair of horizontal movable production unit 700 is operated. The horizontal elevating drive motor 757 is rotated in the opposite direction, and the pair of horizontally extended sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are combined with the central movable decorative unit 550 of the central movable effect unit 500. Move to the positions on both the left and right sides (the position on the front of the base cover 520).

In the above example, when the winning combination becomes a hatchet replay during the ART game, the reel 70 is stopped by the stop operation procedure of pushing back (in the order of right reel 70R → middle reel 70M → left reel 70L). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel 70 may be stopped by another stop operation procedure. In this example, in order to execute the effect of aiming at the "white 7" symbol in the middle of the middle reel 70M, the reels other than the middle reel 70M (right reel 70R or left reel 70L) are stopped first to make the middle reel 70M. When the operation of the stop button 128M is instructed, it is possible to avoid stopping the middle reel 70M by reflexively operating the middle stop button 128M without aiming at the "white 7" symbol. It is possible to entertain the player by performing the production.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this example, the promotion effect is performed by using the "white 7" symbol provided in the middle reel 70M but not in the left reel 70L and the right reel 70R during the ART game. To execute. In other words, during the normal period when the ART game is not executed, the promotion effect is executed by using the "white 7" symbol that is not used as the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination for any of the winning combinations. Further, in this promotion effect, the "white 7" symbol is displayed on each of the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, and the "white 7" symbols are aligned on a predetermined line (middle line in this example). By operating the middle stop button 128M to stop the middle reel 70M, it looks as if it has been promoted to a super ART game (SART game), which has a higher advantage than the ART game because the "white 7" symbols are aligned. Perform promotion production. That is, even if the "White 7" symbol is not actually prepared, the game is promoted from the ART game to the super ART game (SART game), but the super ART game (SART) is promoted by having the "White 7" symbol. By making the player think that he was promoted to (game), he can concentrate on the operation of the middle reel 70M aiming at the "white 7" symbol when the promotion effect is executed, and the "white 7" symbol is complete. Sometimes it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the above example, when the winning combination is a hook replay during the ART game, a "white 7" symbol is displayed on each of the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, and the middle reel is displayed. The "white 7" symbol was stopped at 70M so that the predetermined line (middle line in this example) "white 7" symbol was aligned, but it was displayed on the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. Some form (shape, pattern, Those that form color) (for example, those that form one character with the image displayed on the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R and the pattern provided on the middle reel 70M) and Prepared for a combination of patterns that form a unified concept (for example, a pine image displayed on the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L, a plum image displayed on the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, and a middle reel 70M). It may be a combination of the bamboo pattern and the unified idea of "Shotake-Ume").

Further, in the above example, during normal times when the ART game is not executed, a promotion effect is executed using a "white 7" symbol that is not used as a symbol combination according to the winning combination for any of the winning combinations. As shown, it is not limited to the "white 7" symbol as long as it uses a symbol that is not used as a symbol combination according to the winning combination in any of the winning combinations during normal times when the ART game is not executed. For example, a "blank" symbol or the like may be used.

Further, in the above example, when the promotion effect is executed, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are of the left reel 70L and the right reel 70R among the three reels 70 arranged side by side. It was configured to move to the lowest position covering the front of the upper and middle tiers so that only the lower three symbols of the symbol display area A and the middle reel 70M could be clearly seen, but at least of the three reels 70. It may cover the front surface of one reel 70, and the portion covering the front surface of the reel 70 is not limited to a plurality of stages (upper stage and middle stage in this example), but at least one stage (upper stage, middle stage and lower stage). One of them (the part constituting the effective line may not be covered) may be hidden, or it may cover all the front surfaces of the upper, middle and lower tiers. That is, one reel 70 (left reel 70L corresponding to the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L, right reel 70R corresponding to the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R) by the pair of sub left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub right liquid crystal display device 710R. It may cover more than half of the area, or less than half of one reel 70 (left reel 70L corresponding to the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L, right reel 70R corresponding to the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R). It may cover a part of the area of the.

Further, in this example, the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are configured to instruct the player to operate the stop button 128 while displaying the "white 7" symbol, respectively. The player operates the right stop button 128R by displaying an instruction to operate the stop button 128 without displaying the "white 7" symbol on the pair of sub left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R. The sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R is displayed with the "white 7" symbol, and the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L is displayed with the "white 7" symbol based on the player operating the left stop button 128L. You may do so. Further, in this case, the symbols are scrolled to each of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R until the player operates the stop button 128, and the player operates the stop button 128. The scroll display may be stopped to display the "white 7" symbol. The scroll display means to display while moving up and down or left and right, and corresponds to, for example, a rotation display. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the reel 70 and the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R can be scroll-displayed.

In this way, by operating the operation unit 120 of the door unit 4, the player operates the outer peripheral surfaces of the three reels 70 arranged side by side in the symbol display area A of the game unit 3 facing from a part of the window portion 201a. This is because the plurality of provided symbols are displayed in a variable manner due to the rotation of the reel 70 and then stopped and displayed, and the privilege is given according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the lower effective line (specific area). By the operation on the operation unit 120, the player can be made to play a game that can be throbbing depending on whether or not the symbol can be stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols to which the privilege is given on the effective line. Then, the sub-left liquid crystal display device of the lateral movable effect unit 700 located on the outer side (upper side) of the symbol display area A in the front view depending on the game state that changes due to the game being performed in the symbol display area A. The movable members of the 710L, the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, and the front movable decorative body 710 of the front movable effect unit 300 moved to the symbol display area A side without blocking the effective line, and covered a part of the symbol display area A. Because it is in a state, even if the player concentrates on the game and gazes (stares) in the symbol display area A (the symbol in the variable display or the stop display), a part of the symbol display area A is movable. Since it is blocked by the member, it is possible to make the player surely notice the movement of the movable member, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movable member and enjoy the production by the movable member. Further, since the movable member moves to the front side of the symbol display area A according to the game state, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the symbol display area A by the movable member. It is possible to present a completely different impression of a movable effect to the player, which can give a strong impact to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable member, and the movable member can be used. By blocking a part of the symbol display area A, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be done. At this time, even if the movable member moves to the front side of the symbol display area A, at least the portion of the effective line is not covered by the movable member in the front view, so whether the desired symbol stops on the effective line. It is possible to clearly see whether or not the game is played, and the game can be enjoyed. At the same time, the movable member does not obscure the pattern displayed on the effective line, which gives the player a sense of distrust. It is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with peace of mind, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, when the movable member is moved from above the front view symbol display area A to the front side of the symbol display area A in the gaming state in which a plurality of symbol rows are variablely displayed in the symbol display area A, the symbol display area A is displayed. Although the symbols located on the effective line in A can be seen, the symbols located in other parts cannot be visually recognized because they are blocked by the movable member. It is necessary to make predictions or to look at the symbols that come on the effective line by paying close attention to the visible parts other than the effective line in the symbol display area A, and a plurality of symbol rows that are displayed in a variable manner. It becomes difficult to know the timing at which the desired symbol is located on the effective line among the symbols, and it becomes difficult to stop and display the desired symbol on the effective line. That is, since the difficulty level of the game in which the desired symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line becomes high, the player can be motivated, the game can be enjoyed, and the difficulty level of the game is high. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that the privilege given to the player is special, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as a movable member that moves to the front side of the symbol display area A, a sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and a sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R that can cover a part of the symbol display area A except on the effective line, and a symbol display area. Since the front movable decorative body 310 capable of covering the portion other than the effective line from A is provided, the movable member to be moved to the front side of the symbol display area A is selected according to the game state. , Different movable effects can be presented to the player, and various effects can make the player less bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L, the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, and the front movable decorative body 310 have different ranges covering the symbol display area A in front view, they move to the front side of the symbol display area A. Depending on the movable member, the appearance of the symbol display area A can be changed, and the game in the symbol display area A can be given variety to make the player more entertaining. Specifically, when the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are moved to the front side of the symbol display area A, the symbol display area in the symbol display area A excluding the effective line and the effective line. Since a part of A can be visually recognized, the player is made to estimate the symbol within the visible range of the effective line and a part of the symbol display area A, and the difficulty of the game can be increased. It is possible to motivate the player and suppress the decline in the interest. On the other hand, when the front movable decorative body 310 is moved to the front side of the symbol display area A, only the effective line in the symbol display area A can be visually recognized, so that the difficulty level of the game can be further increased and the game is given. It is possible to make the privilege seem to be special, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the front movable decorative body 310 is arranged on the front side of the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R, the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R are first placed in the symbol display area. When the front movable decorative body 310 is moved to the front side of the symbol display area A after being moved to the front side of A, the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub right liquid crystal display device 710R are covered with the front movable decorative body 310. In addition, since the part visible from the player side in the symbol display area A can be narrowed so as to be only on the effective line, it is possible to present the player with a multi-step game or effect. , It is possible to make the player more entertaining the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are moved to the front side of the symbol display area A, in addition to the symbols on the effective line, three symbol rows (reel 70) arranged side by side are arranged. Since a plurality of symbols can be visually recognized in at least one of the symbol rows, and the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are separated from each other to the left and right, left and right. When only one of the pair of separated sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R is moved to the front side of the symbol display area A, one of the left and right sides of the symbol display area A excluding the effective line ( Only the left reel 70L or the right reel 70R) can be covered, and when the pair of sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are moved together to the front side of the symbol display area A, they are paired with the effective line. The left and right sides (left reel 70L and right reel 70R) of the symbol display area A excluding the center side (middle reel 70M) between the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R may be covered. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the symbol row (reel 70) that can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, and the player can be made to pay attention to the symbol row. Since the coverage range of the symbol display area A by the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R can be made more diverse, the player is less likely to get bored with various effects. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Therefore, for example, after the plurality of symbol rows are variablely displayed by the operation of the operation unit 120, the left and right symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols on the effective line in the stopped and displayed symbol rows are predetermined to give the privilege. When the symbol can satisfy the condition (combination of symbols) (so-called reach), the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L are on the front side of the symbol row (left reel 70L and right reel 70R) that has already been stopped and displayed. By moving the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, it is possible to make it possible to clearly see only the variable display symbol row (middle reel 70M) that has not yet been stopped and displayed, and the variable display is displayed. It is possible to emphasize the pattern sequence. As a result, the player's line of sight is focused on the changing symbol sequence that is visible without being blocked by the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. Therefore, it is possible to actively perform a game in which the operation unit 120 (stop button 128) is operated so that the desired symbol stops on the effective line, and the player is entertained by the game. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, since the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R can display the effect image, in addition to the movements of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L, the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, and the front movable decorative body 310. The display of the effect images by the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R can also entertain the player, and it is possible to present various effects to the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored. With the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R moved to the front side of the symbol display area A according to the game state, the design is displayed on the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. When the same effect image as in the area A is displayed, the player has the illusion that the pattern during the variable display or the stop display on the rear side can be seen through the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player operates the operation unit 120 of the door unit 4, a plurality of symbols are displayed in the symbol display area A of the game unit 3 facing from a part of the window portion 201a. After the variable display, the stop display is displayed, and the privilege is given according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the lower effective line (specific area). Therefore, the privilege is given on the effective line by the operation on the operation unit 120. It is possible to have the player perform a game that can be throbbing depending on whether or not the symbol can be stopped and displayed by the combination of the assigned symbols. A light guide plate 202 is attached to the rear side of the window portion 201a facing the symbol display area A, and the light guide plate 202 produces an effect on substantially the entire window portion 201a excluding the effective line (non-decorative region 202a) in the front view. Images can be displayed. More specifically, a decorative layer (diffusion sheet) having a plurality of minute lenses (transparent dots) is provided on one surface of the light guide plate 202 having substantially the same size as the window portion 201a, and the upper and lower sides of the light guide plate 202 are provided. It is provided with a light guide plate upper decorative substrate 205 and a light guide plate lower decorative substrate 206 on which LEDs capable of irradiating a pair of outer peripheral surfaces facing the light guide plate are mounted, and the light guide plate upper decorative substrate 205 and the light guide plate lower. Light from the LED of the decorative substrate 206 enters the light guide plate 202 from the upper and lower outer peripheral surfaces of the light guide plate 202, and is alternately reflected on the front surface and the back surface of the light guide plate 202 to be guided along the light guide plate 202. .. Then, when the light guided in the light guide plate 202 reaches the minute lens, the light is reflected forward by the minute lens, and the minute lens appears to shine from the front (player side). The effect image stippled by a plurality of minute lenses is emitted and displayed. Therefore, when the effect image is displayed by the light guide plate 202 according to the game state that changes due to the game being performed in the symbol display area A, the symbol display area A faces a part in front of the symbol display area A. Since the effect image is displayed on substantially the entire window portion 201a of the door unit 4, the player can be surprised and have a strong impact, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the abbreviation for the window portion 201a. By displaying a large production image throughout, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it raises the player's expectation for the game and suppresses the decline in interest. Can be made to. When the effect image is displayed by the light guide plate 202, the effect image is displayed over substantially the entire window portion 201a excluding the effective line (non-decorative area 202a) in the symbol display area A in the front view. Therefore, the effective line is not obstructed by the effect image, and the player can clearly see the effective line in the symbol display area A, so that the decisive part (effective line) in the game cannot be seen. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of distrust, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the effect image is displayed by the light guide plate 202 arranged in front of the symbol display area A by the three reels 70 in which the game is played by the operation of the player, the symbol display area A is made smaller. Since a large effect image can be displayed without doing so, the symbol display area A can be enlarged to be conspicuous in the front viewing window portion 201a, and the slot machine can be played with enhanced appeal to the player. This slot machine 1 can be easily selected.

Further, when the effect image is displayed by the light guide plate 202 in the state where the three symbol rows are variablely displayed by the three reels 70 in the game unit 3, the effective line (non-decorative area 202a) in the symbol display area A is displayed. Although the located symbol can be seen, the symbol located in other parts is obstructed by the effect image and cannot be visually recognized well. , It is necessary to pay close attention to the part other than the non-decorative area 202a in the symbol display area A so that the symbol coming to the non-decorative area 202a can be seen. It becomes difficult to know the timing at which the desired symbol is located in the non-decorative region 202a (effective line), and it becomes difficult to stop and display the desired symbol on the effective line. That is, since the difficulty level of the game in which the desired symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line becomes high, the player can be motivated, the game can be enjoyed, and the difficulty level of the game is high. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that the privilege given to the player is special, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as an effect image is displayed over substantially the entire window portion 201a, the effect image can be displayed by irradiating light from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide plate 202 having a plurality of minute lenses (transparent dots). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost for displaying the effect image as compared with the case of using the liquid crystal panel, and it is possible to reduce the configuration arranged on the outer periphery of the effect image to be displayed. The light guide plate 202 can be made relatively large to display a larger effect image, which can give a stronger impact to the player.

Further, since the portion of the light guide plate 202 for displaying the effect image is a sheet-shaped decorative layer, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the transparency of the light guide plate even if the decorative layer of the light guide plate 202 is provided with a plurality of minute lenses. It is possible to make the symbol display area A and other members arranged on the rear side clearly visible when the effect image is not displayed.

Further, on the outer peripheral surface of the light guide plate 202, a reflective layer (reflective member) is provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of both the left and right sides where the LEDs of the decorative substrate 205 on the light guide plate and the decorative substrate 206 below the light guide plate are not irradiated with light. Therefore, since the reflective layer prevents the light from leaking outward from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide plate 202 and reflects the light inward, the light can be guided to the entire light guide plate 202, and the effect image can be displayed. Since the entire light can be emitted uniformly and the amount of light in the light guide plate 202 can be increased, the effect image can be emitted brighter and easier to see, and the effect image can be enjoyed by the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a peripheral control unit 470 having a peripheral control board 471 that gives a privilege according to a gaming state is provided behind the main liquid crystal display device 450 of the middle unit 5 as an electronic component. Is attached, and the cylindrically extending portions of the plurality (two) hinge shaft portions 451 provided in the main liquid crystal display device 450 are arranged in the housing body 10 of the middle unit 5. The main liquid crystal display device 450 is rotatably attached to the middle unit base 400 by being inserted and held from above with respect to the plurality (two) bearing portions 407 of the middle unit base 400. Then, in the middle unit base 400, a mounting recess 420 recessed forward is formed on the upper side where the hinge shaft portion 451 in the bearing portion 407 of the plurality of bearing portions 407 is inserted, and the mounting recess 420 is formed. A security member 490 is attached to the hinge shaft portion 451 to prevent the hinge shaft portion 451 from moving in the direction (upward direction) away from the bearing portion 407. Therefore, when the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the peripheral control unit 470 are removed from the middle unit base 400, the hinge shaft portion 451 of the main liquid crystal display device 450 must be removed from the middle unit base 400 unless the security member 490 is removed from the middle unit base 400. Since the main liquid crystal display device 450 cannot be removed by removing it from the bearing portion 407 of the 400, it takes time to remove the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the peripheral control unit 470. It is possible to rush a person who tries to commit fraudulent activity to the peripheral control board 471 of the peripheral control unit 470, and hesitate to take away or cheat the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the peripheral control unit 470, resulting in theft or fraudulent activity. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such things.

Further, in order to remove the security member 490 attached to the middle unit base 400, it is necessary to remove the cap 492 inserted in the pedestal portion 491 and then remove the screw (not shown) to which the pedestal portion 491 is attached. Therefore, it takes time and effort to remove the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the peripheral control unit 470 from the middle unit base 400, and the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the peripheral control unit 470 are taken away or illegally modified. It is possible to hesitate and suppress the occurrence of theft and fraudulent activities.

Further, in the security member 490, the cap 492 is fitted into the bottomed cylindrical pedestal portion 491, and the protrusion (not shown) of the cap 492 is projected into the recess (not shown) of the pedestal portion 491 to be locked to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the cap 492 from the pedestal portion 491, and it is possible to further enhance the deterrence against theft, fraudulent activity, and the like. It should be noted that the cap 492 can be easily removed from the pedestal portion 491 by a special tool that has a pair of tip portions that can be inserted between the pedestal portion 491 and the cap 492 and that can hold the cap 492 by bringing the pair of tip portions close to each other. It is desirable to be able to remove it. Specifically, when the tip of this special tool is inserted into the recess of the pedestal portion 491 where the protrusion of the cap 492 protrudes, the protrusion is elastically deformed by the tip of the special tool and the protrusion and the recess are locked. Can be released, and the cap 492 can be easily removed from the pedestal portion 491. By allowing only the person who maintains the slot machine 1 to possess this special tool, the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the peripheral control unit 470 can be deterred from theft and fraudulent activities, while the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the peripheral control unit 470 are deterred. The workability of maintenance for the display device 450 and the peripheral control unit 470 can be improved, and the burden on the game hall side in which the slot machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

Further, since a part of the pedestal portion 491 is inserted into the mounting recess 420 recessed from the rear surface of the middle unit base 400 at a predetermined depth to mount the security member 490, it is like a flat-blade screwdriver. Even if the tip of a tool with a flat and sharp tip is moved toward the security member 490 along the surface of the middle unit base 400, the tip only abuts on the side surface of the security member 490 (pedestal portion 491) and is inside. Since it does not enter between the unit base 400 and the pedestal portion 491, the security member 490 cannot be easily removed even with a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver. Sufficient deterrence can be exerted, and the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the peripheral control unit 470 can be hesitated to take away or illegally modify the main liquid crystal display device 450 and the peripheral control unit 470 to suppress the occurrence of theft or fraudulent activity.

Further, since the main liquid crystal display device 450 attached to the middle unit base 400 can be hinged with respect to the middle unit base 400 around a plurality of hinge shaft portions 451 as a whole, the main liquid crystal display device 450 can be rotated more than the main liquid crystal display device 450. The main liquid crystal display device 450 is removed from the middle unit base 400 when maintaining the members arranged on the middle unit base 400 side or when maintaining the main liquid crystal display device 450 from the side facing the middle unit base 400. Maintenance can be performed without it, and the labor required for maintenance can be simplified and the load on the game hall side can be reduced.

Further, as described above, since the security member 490 can prevent the main liquid crystal display device 450 from being illegally removed from the middle unit base 400, the rear side of the main liquid crystal display device 450 can be moved according to the gaming state. Even if the peripheral control unit 470 having the peripheral control board 471 is attached, the peripheral control unit 470 is removed from the middle unit base 400 together with the main liquid crystal display device 450, and the peripheral control board 471 of the peripheral control unit 470 is removed. It is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the LCD, and it is possible to avoid an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board 471 that grants the privilege.

Further, since the peripheral control board 471 that controls the granting of the privilege among the controls related to the game is attached to the rear side of the main liquid crystal display device 450, the main control board 21 that performs other control is another. Since it is attached to the part (inside the housing body 10), the control related to the game is shared by multiple boards, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of overload, and the game is interrupted due to the overload. It is possible to prevent the person from being irritated, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, from top to bottom in the symbol display area A (game area) of the game unit 3 visible through the window portion 201a of the top cover 201 in the top cover unit 200 of the door unit 4. For a game in which the symbols in the symbol row fluctuate, a state indicator 800 that displays the game state is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower side of the symbol display area A in the front view, and the lower side of the symbol display area A is arranged. Since it is formed in a band shape shorter than the length, the distance of line-of-sight movement between the symbol display area A and the state display 800 is as short as possible, and the player paying attention to the symbol display area A. The state display 800 can be easily entered into the field of view, the game state displayed on the state display 800 can be reliably recognized, and the eye movement is reduced to prevent the eyeball from becoming tired at an early stage. It can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to eyeball fatigue. Further, since the movement of the line of sight between the symbol display area A and the state display 800 is small, the state display 800 can be made easier to see and the player can accurately recognize information such as the game state. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the front surface of the status display 800 is directed forward and upward so that the vertical line extending forward from the front surface of the status display 800 intersects the vertical line extending forward from the front surface of the symbol display area A in the front view. Since it is tilted to, the front surface of the status display 800 can be directed toward the player located in front of the slot machine 1, so that the status display 800 can be made more visible, as described above. The action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, since the state indicator 800 is arranged at a position in contact with the lower side in the front view of the symbol display area A in which the game in which the symbol of the symbol row is changed from the top to the bottom is performed, the status indicator 800 is arranged in the symbol display area A. When the player pays attention to the game being performed, the player's line of sight moves from top to bottom according to the fluctuation of the symbol, and the line of sight to the state indicator 800 located below the symbol display area A. Is easy to move, so that the status display 800 can be made easier to see, and the number of medals stored in the slot 123 displayed on the status display 800 and can be used for the game, the number of medals to be paid out, one. It is possible to reliably recognize the number of medals (number of bets), replay (replay), and other game states used in one game.

Further, since the status indicator 800 is attached so as to be in contact with the lower side of the symbol display area A arranged at the most conspicuous position in the front view of the door unit 4, the status indicator 800 is also arranged at the conspicuous position. Therefore, the rear surface of the status indicator 800 is located at a prominent position even on the rear side of the door unit 4. Since the setting indicator 810 is attached to the rear side of the status indicator 800 and the setting switch 62 of the switch unit 60 is attached near the front end inside the housing body 10, the setting of the slot machine 1 is changed. When the door unit 4 is opened from the housing body 10 (housing unit 2), the rear side of the door unit 4 and the inside of the housing body 10 can be visually recognized together, and the door unit 4 is attached to the rear side of the door unit 4. The setting switch 62 attached near the front end inside the housing body 10 can be operated while looking at the setting display 810, which facilitates the setting work of the game content. When the setting is changed by operating the setting switch 62, the setting display 810 is mounted at a prominent position on the rear side of the door unit 4 (rear side of the status display 800), so that the setting display 810 is used. You can easily find it without searching.

Further, the status display 800 and the setting display 810 mounted on the door unit 4 are configured to display the game status and the setting status by the main control unit 20 mounted in the housing body 10. , The wiring member for connecting the status display 800 and the setting display 810 to the main control unit 20 can be partially shared or bundled together, so that the slot machine 1 can be assembled. It is possible to simplify the labor and reduce the number of components, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the slot machine 1.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 is attached to the upper middle base 651 by the rotation drive mechanism 690 of the upper middle movable effect unit 650 in the upper middle movable effect unit 600 of the middle unit 5. When the left shaft portion 651a is rotated around the left shaft portion 651a, the elongated left transmission slit 662d formed in the left decorative body base 662 in the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 becomes the left shaft portion 651a (rotating bearing portion). It will revolve around 662c). Since the left transmission pin 681 of the transmission slider 680 is slidably inserted in the left transmission slit 662d, the left transmission pin 681 slides in the left transmission slit 662d as the left transmission slit 662d revolves. At the same time, the left transmission pin 681 is pressed by the revolving left transmission slit 662d, and the transmission slider 680 slides in the vertical direction. More specifically, for example, the rotation drive mechanism 690 rotates the upper-middle-left movable decorative unit unit 660 in a direction away from the axis connecting the left shaft portion 651a and the right shaft portion 651b by the left transmission slit 662d. Occasionally, the transmission slider 680 is oriented in the same direction away from the axis connecting the left shaft portion 651a and the right shaft portion 651b via the left transmission pin 681 slidably inserted into the left transmission slit 662d. It will move. Since the transmission slider 680 is provided with a right transmission pin 682 slidably inserted in the right transmission slit 672d of the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670, the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 is provided. When the transmission slider 680 slides in one direction in the vertical direction along with the rotation, the right transmission pin 682 also moves in the same direction, so that the moving right transmission pin 682 presses the right transmission slit 672d in one direction in the vertical direction. The upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 slides the right transmission slit 672d in the right transmission slit 672d and the right transmission slit 672d revolves around the right shaft portion 651b. It will rotate to the center.

At this time, the left transmission slit 662d and the right transmission slit 672d are respectively specified distances (left shaft portion 651a and right) from the left shaft portion 651a (rotary bearing portion 662c) and the right shaft portion 651b (rotary bearing portion 672c). The left transmission pin 681 and the right transmission pin 682 of the transmission slider 680 are formed between the left shaft portion 651a and the right shaft portion 651b in front view, respectively, while being formed within the range of the distance from the shaft portion 651b. Since the right transmission pin 682 is pressed, the right transmission slit 672d revolves in the direction opposite to the left transmission slit 662d. That is, when the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 is rotated in a predetermined direction by the rotation drive mechanism 690, the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 becomes the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 via the transmission slider 680. In front view, the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 are set to be in a state of being separated from each other at the farthest distance from each other, or in the upper middle. The tips of the left movable decorative unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit 670 can be brought into contact with each other (combined) to form one large annular decorative body. Then, assuming that the tips of the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 are most separated from each other, the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 are in front. It is located behind the cover 652 and cannot be seen from the player side.

Therefore, when the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 is rotated in an appropriate direction by the rotation drive mechanism 690 of the upper middle left movable effect unit 650, the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 are obtained. The upper middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 can be hidden, so that the upper middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 and the upper middle right can be hidden. The appearance of the movable decorative unit 670 can give a strong impact to the player, and can strongly attract the player's attention to the upper middle left movable decorative unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit 670. At the same time, the appearance of the upper middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 can make the player think that there is something good, and the player's expectation for the game. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 are rotatably attached to the left shaft portion 651a and the right shaft portion 651b of the upper middle base 651. At the same time, the left transmission pin 681 and the right transmission pin 682 of the transmission slider 680 slidably attached to the upper middle base 651 are placed in the left transmission slit 662d of the upper middle left movable decoration unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decoration unit. Simply by slidably mounting it in the right transmission slit 672d of the 670, the pair of decorative bodies (upper middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 and upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670) can be rotated in opposite directions. Since the movable effect unit 650 can be reliably assembled, it is possible to prevent assembly errors and reduce the labor required for assembly, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the slot machine 1.

Further, the left shaft portion 651a and the right shaft portion 651b are attached to the front side and the rear surface side of the upper middle base 651, respectively, and the upper middle left movable to the front side and the rear surface side of the upper middle base 651. The decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 will be attached, and the positions of the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 will be different in the front-rear direction. In the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670, the tip side of each passes from the left shaft portion 651a and the right shaft portion 651b to the right shaft portion 651b and the left shaft portion 651a. It can be formed to extend to the opposite side. That is, with the center between the left shaft portion 651a and the right shaft portion 651b aligned with the center in the left-right direction of the middle unit 5 (slot machine 1), the upper middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 and the upper middle The tip side of the right movable decorative unit 670 is passed from the left shaft portion 651a (rotating bearing portion 662c) and the right shaft portion 651b (rotating bearing portion 672c) to the right shaft portion 651b and the left shaft portion 651a. Since it can be extended to the vicinity of the left-right end of the middle unit 5, the length of the upper middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 is set to the length of the middle unit 5 in the left-right direction. The upper middle left movable decorative unit unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 can be made as long (larger) as possible than before. Therefore, since the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 can be made larger, a large pair of upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative body unit can be made larger. By combining the 670, a larger decorative body can be shown to the player, which can have a strong impact on the player and can strongly attract the player's attention. It is possible to entertain the movements of the left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, when the upper-middle-left movable decorative body unit 660 is rotated by the rotation drive mechanism 690, the upper-middle-right movable decorative body unit 670 can be rotated in opposite directions via the transmission slider 680. The rotation drive mechanism is compared with the case where the middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative unit unit 670 are rotated by different drive sources (for example, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc.). The configuration of the 690 can be simplified, the space required for the rotation drive mechanism 690 can be reduced, and the rotation drive mechanism 690 becomes smaller, so that it is easier to secure a relatively empty space. By securing an empty space, the upper middle left movable decorative body unit 660 and the upper middle right movable decorative body unit 670 can be made larger.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in front view, the lower long side of the substantially rectangular base unit 510 in the central movable effect unit 500 of the middle unit 5 is adjacent to the symbol display area A as the game area. In addition, the upper long side of the base unit 510 is adjacent to the main liquid crystal display device 450, and a pair of advancing / retreating units 530 symmetrically with respect to the center of the long side direction (left-right direction) in the base unit 510. (Left unit 530L and right unit 530R) are housed. In this state, when the central elevating drive motor 571 of the advance / retreat drive mechanism 570 is driven according to the game state that changes due to the game performed in the symbol display area A, the rear ends of the pair of advance / retreat units 530 are pressed. , The tip side of the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 is guided to the guiding portion 513 of the base unit 510, respectively, and goes straight out in a state of being in contact with each other from the center of the long side of the main liquid crystal display device 450 side (upper side) in the base unit 510. The centrally movable decorative body 553, which protrudes toward (upward) and has translucency via a connecting base 551 connecting the tips of the pair of advancing / retreating units 530, is on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 450. Will move away from the base unit 510. An electrical effect member including a central movable decorative body decorative substrate and a central rotary drive motor 554 is attached to the rear side of the central movable decorative body 551 on the connecting base 551, and the central movable decorative body decorative substrate is used for centrally movable decoration. Since the body 553 can be light-emitting decorated or the central movable decorative body 553 can be rotated by the central rotation drive motor 554 to drive the effect, it is combined with the movement (elevation) of the central movable decorative body 553 by the advance / retreat drive mechanism 570. It is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the effect of the effect of the central movable decorative body 553 can be further enhanced by the various effects. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Then, the wiring member 525 for supplying electricity or the like to the electrical effect member such as the central rotation drive motor 554 is a plurality of holding pieces of the advancing / retreating unit 530 (locking piece 531a of the first outer plate 531 and the second outer plate 532). Since it is held by the holding portion 532b and the locking piece 534b of the inner second plate 534), the wiring member 525 is in a state of extending along the band-shaped advancing / retreating unit 530, so that from the player side. The wiring member 525 looks as one with the pair of advancing / retreating units 530, which makes it possible to improve the overall appearance, and fully demonstrates the effect of decoration and movement of the central movable decorative body 553 protruding from the base unit 510. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, when the pair of flexible advancing / retreating units 530 is projected outward from the base unit 510, the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 may be used as a plurality of first frames (outer first plate 531) and second frames (outer first plate 531). The magnetic force of the magnet 538 provided on the inner first plate 533) attracts each other, and the plurality of first and second frames abut against each other in a linearly extended state, and the outer first and second pieces extend linearly. Since the rotation of the plate 531 and the inner first plate 533 to the side in contact with each other is restricted by the contact between the regulation protrusion 531d constituting the rotation regulation mechanism and the regulation recess 533b. Even if the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 try to bend to one side with respect to the direction in which they are in contact with each other, the advancing / retreating unit 530 on the outer peripheral side cannot bend any more due to the rotation regulation mechanism, and the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 Is maintained in a linearly extended state. Therefore, since the rigidity of the portion of the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 protruding outward from the base unit 510 becomes higher, the central movable decorative body 553 and the central rotation drive motor 554 attached to the tips of the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 Since it is possible to more sufficiently support the electrical effect member such as, etc., the central movable decorative body 553 attached to the tip side of the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 should be enlarged or provided with an electrical effect member capable of performing a complicated effect drive. Therefore, the central movable decorative body 553 having a higher effect of effect can be provided, and the effect of the central movable decorative body 553 can be more enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, a plurality of holding pieces of the advancing / retreating unit 530 (locking piece 531a of the first outer plate 531, holding portion 532b of the second outer plate 532, and locking piece 534b of the inner second plate 534) are combined with the advancing / retreating drive mechanism 570. A plurality of holding pieces (locking piece 531a of the first outer plate 531, holding portion 532b of the second outer plate 532, and inner second plate 534) are provided on the side opposite to the side to be brought into contact with each other. Even if the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 are brought into contact with each other while the wiring member 525 is held by the locking piece 534b), the wiring member 525 is not sandwiched by the pair of advancing / retreating units 530, and the wiring member 525 is sandwiched. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as electric leakage and disconnection due to wear, and it is possible to reliably drive the electrical component effect member such as the central rotation drive motor 554 to reliably exert the above-mentioned action and effect. Further, since the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 hold the wiring member 525 on the side opposite to the side in contact with each other, when the magnets 538 provided in each advancing / retreating unit 530 attract each other and magnetically adhere to each other. The magnetic force is not weakened by the wiring member 525, and the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 can be satisfactorily magnetized to each other by the magnets 538, respectively, and the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 protruding from the base unit 510. It is possible to sufficiently support an electrical effect member such as a central movable decorative body 553 and a central rotation drive motor 554 attached to the tip side with increased rigidity.

Further, when the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 is projected outward from the base unit 510, the rear ends of the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 are pressed, and the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 protruding outward are retracted into the base unit 510. Since the rear ends of the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 are towed at the same time, a plurality of holding pieces (the locking piece 531a of the first outer plate 531, the holding portion 532b of the second outer plate 532, and the inner side) are pulled. The wiring member 525 held along the advance / retreat unit 530 by the locking piece 534b) of the second plate 534 does not come into contact with the member for moving the advance / retreat unit 530 in the advance / retreat drive mechanism 570, and the wiring member 525 does not come into contact with the member. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the wiring.

Further, since the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 are guided by the guiding unit 513 in the base unit 510, the advancing / retreating unit 530 is the base when the rear end of the band-shaped advancing / retreating unit 530 is pressed by the advancing / retreating drive mechanism 570. It is possible to prevent the unit 510 from bending in a wavy manner, and the advancing / retreating unit 530 can be guided straight toward its moving direction (the direction in which the guiding portion 513 extends) by the guiding portion 513. Therefore, the tip side of the advancing / retreating unit 530 can be reliably moved by the amount pressed by the advancing / retreating drive mechanism 570, and the tip side of the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 can be projected to the outside of the base unit 510 without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to embody the slot machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the advancing / retreating unit 530 is guided by rolling the plurality of rollers 536 attached to the advancing / retreating unit 530 in the guiding portion 513, the advancing / retreating unit 530 is slid and guided. Compared with the case, the resistance acting when inducing the advancing / retreating unit 530 can be reduced, and the advancing / retreating unit 530 can be guided smoothly.

Further, the first piece and the second piece forming the advancing / retreating unit are respectively configured by the outer first plate 531 and the outer second plate 532, and the inner first plate 533 and the inner second plate 534, respectively. Therefore, both ends of the strip-shaped outer first plate 531 and outer second plate 532, and inner first plate 533 and inner second plate 534 are connected by connecting pins 535, respectively. The pieces and the second piece are each in the shape of a square frame, and the rigidity of each of the first piece and the second piece can be increased. Occasionally, the centrally movable decorative body 553 (centrally movable decorative body unit 550) attached to the tip can be supported in good condition.

Further, the short side of the base unit 510 is shorter than the advancing / retreating unit 530 (left unit 530L and right unit 530R), and the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 are projected upward from the long side of the base unit 510. When the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 is projected upward by the drive mechanism 570, the tip of the pair of advancing / retreating units 530 protrudes upward longer than the short side of the base unit 510, and the central movable decorative body unit 550 is projected upward from the base unit 510. Can be moved longer than the short side of. Therefore, since the central movable decorative unit 550 that moves upward from the long side of the base unit 510 can be moved longer than the short side of the base unit 510, the player can be wondered, and the player's The central movable decorative unit 550 can attract attention strongly, and the central movable decorative unit 550 that moves greatly can surprise the player greatly, entertaining the player and suppressing the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, the central movable decorative unit 550 (central movable decorative body 553) is projected (raised) upward from the base unit 510 arranged adjacent to the front view symbol display area A on the side opposite to the symbol display area A. Therefore, even if the central movable decorative unit 550 is projected upward, the central movable decorative unit 550 does not block the inside of the symbol display area A, and the symbol in the symbol display area A is not obstructed by the player. Can be made to be visually recognized well, and the game in the symbol display area A can be surely enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the base unit 510 (central movable decorative unit 550) is arranged so as to be adjacent to the symbol display area A in the front view, the central movable decorative unit unit when the player visually recognizes the inside of the symbol display area A. Since the 550 can be easily seen, when the central movable decorative unit 550 is moved (moved) by the advancing / retreating drive mechanism 570 or the central rotation drive motor 554, the central movable decorative unit 550 becomes movable for the player. It is possible to make it easier to notice, and it is possible to shift the line of sight to the movable central movable decorative unit 550 so that the central movable decorative unit 550 (central movable decorative body 553) can be reliably shown to be movable, and the central movable decorative body can be shown. It is possible to entertain the movement of the unit 550 and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, when the central movable decorative body 553 (central movable decorative body unit 550) is projected from the base unit 510, the central movable decorative body 553 blocks a part of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 450, so that the game is played. It is possible to make it easier for a person to notice the protrusion (movement) of the central movable decoration body 553, to attract the player's attention to the central movable decoration body 553, and to attract the player to the central movable decoration body 553. By paying attention, it is possible to entertain the player with the effect of the central movable decorative body 553, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

[10-1. Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, the main board 409 displays whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines in the symbol display window 401 (the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is displayed. Whether or not it is determined. FIG. 58 specifically describes the content of this determination process.

When all the reels 70L, 70M, and 70R are stopped by the reel stop processing, whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on one of the effective lines from the mode of the stop stitch in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination). Whether or not the combination mode of the symbols to be used is displayed) is determined. In particular, the stop stitch when all the reels 70 are in the stop state is called a stop roll.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state and the OFF state of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a bonus game in-game flag). If the flag during the bonus game is ON, the determination in step S301 is satisfied, so the process proceeds to step S302. Further, if the flag in the bonus game is OFF, the determination in step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the valid line is a bonus symbol (symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination). Explaining the determination of the symbol combination with a specific example, if the bonus is BB1, the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is a symbol arrangement of "red 7" on the effective line, and is described on any diagonal line. It can be determined that the two types of BB symbols (bonus symbols) have stopped when the arrangement of various symbols is stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the valid line (YES in step S302), the bonus game start process related to the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process ends. do. The bonus game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the valid line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the valid line is a replay symbol (symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination), and if it is determined to be a replay symbol, the replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay. After the process of step S305, the replay winning flag is turned off (step S306), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the valid line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), the symbol combination is a small winning combination symbol (a symbol combination indicating a small winning combination) as the next determination process. ) (Step S308). If it is determined in step S308 that it is a small winning combination symbol, as a process of step S309, a specified number of medals are paid out according to the prepared small winning combination symbols (a specified number of medals are paid from the medal discharging device 110). put out). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED612). As a result, the player is notified (notified, displayed) that a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the small winning combination have been paid out. Then, after the processing of step S309 is completed, the corresponding small winning combination winning flag is turned off (step S310), and the processing is completed.

When it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the effective line is not a small winning combination symbol (NO in step S308), any of the determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 described above is not satisfied, and any of the symbols are on the effective line. The winning combination designs are not available. In addition, the result at this time is also called "missing eye (combination mode of disjointed symbols)". In such a case, the loss process is executed (step S311). In the loss processing, if the winning flag that is ON at this point is another winning flag excluding the bonus, the winning flag is turned off. If none of the winning flags are ON (at this time, the loss flag is ON), the loss flag is turned OFF. After the loss processing in step S311, the determination processing is terminated.

The process from step S302 to step S311 described above is a process to be executed when the gaming state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state. Next, the processing after step S312 performed when the determination in step S301 is not satisfied will be described. The process here is a process to be executed during a bonus game (BB game) in which the gaming state is controlled to the bonus state.

In step S312, it is determined whether or not the bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the valid line. The "bonus game payout symbol" here means a general term for a combination of symbols in which medals are paid out by aligning them during the bonus game, and specifically, a bonus game payout combination (general in this example). It is the same as the small winning combination whose payout is specified in the state or internal state, but a special bonus-only winning combination may be prepared). If an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to all the bonus game payout symbols (step S313). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal discharge device 110, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the payout number display LED612. By such a medal payout process, the player is notified (notified, displayed) that a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the payout combination at the time of the bonus game have been paid out.

Following step S313, in step S314, a bonus game end determination process for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 60), and then the determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol has not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is turned off (step S315), and the process ends. As a pattern of NO in step S312, it is conceivable that the payout combination at the time of the bonus game is won but the payout combination is not won, or the payout combination at the time of the bonus game is not won. In the process of step S315, in the former case, the establishment flag of the payout combination at the time of the bonus game is turned off, and in the latter case, the loss flag is turned off. If a bonus-dedicated role that is always won during the bonus game is prepared, and if the bonus-dedicated role can be won without being missed, the process of step S315 is performed. It may be omitted.

The above-mentioned processes of steps S301 to S315 are game state determination processes performed by the main board 409 (particularly CPU 1110), and after that, ART game determination processes are performed in steps S320.

Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has an ART function as described above, a determination process (ART game determination process) relating to continuation, termination, game number management, etc. of the ART game is performed for each game. There is a need to do. Since the ART game determination process corresponds to the process of the performance that affects the generation of the instruction, the main board 409 executes it.

The timing at which the ART game determination process is performed may be any appropriate timing among the determination processes shown in FIG. 58, but here, as an example, of each process of steps S306, S310, S311, S314, and S315. Later, it is assumed that the ART game determination process of step S320 is performed. The details of the ART game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

[10-1-1. Bonus game start process]
If the determination in step S302 of FIG. 58 is satisfied, the bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start process will be described with reference to FIG. 59.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether the bonus flag (for example, the BB flag) is ON. When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the flag during the bonus game is turned ON and the bonus flag is turned OFF. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the bonus game is cleared. As a result, the cumulative number of payouts is accumulated from the next game. Then, from the next game, the bonus game is started with the number of bets of the specified number of bonus games (in this example, the specified number of BB games is two).

If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF. That is, it can occur either by some illegal means (for example, a goto act) or by a failure of the slot machine 1. Therefore, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on and the above-mentioned LED or the like is displayed to notify the occurrence of the error.

[10-1-2. Bonus game end judgment process]
Subsequently, the bonus game end determination process in step S314 of FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

First, in step S451, in response to the fact that the medals have been paid out in step S313 of FIG. 58, the number of payouts of the game is added to the cumulative number of payouts during the bonus game.

Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative number of payouts exceeds the total number of payouts (for example, 200) specified for each bonus. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, and the cumulative number of payouts during the bonus game is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED612 or the like. The cumulative payout number is separately provided with an LED or the like for display. It may be displayed on this).

On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is turned off (step S460), and the process ends.

[10-1-3. ART game judgment processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of the ART game determination process. The ART game is a game executed based on winning the ART in the ART lottery, and if the winning combination of the push order small role (push order bell) is won while the ART game is being executed, "appropriate". Instruction information such as "pushing order" is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), and a teaching effect (navigation display) along with the instruction function display is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 450 or the like. The ART game determination process is a determination process relating to the start, continuation, end, etc. of such an ART game, and is executed by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110) which is the control body of the ART. Hereinafter, an example of the ART game determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

First, the outline of the ART game will be described. The ART game is started when the start condition of the ART game is satisfied, and when the start condition of the ART game continuously executed in the subsequent game period is satisfied until the end condition of the ART is satisfied. The predetermined internal flag (ART flag) is turned ON to start the ART game, and the ART flag is turned OFF at the end of the ART game. Information such as internal flags related to the ART game such as the ART flag and the number of ART games described later is held in the memory (for example, RAM 1114) in the main board 409 that controls the ART game, but in the sub board 510. Similar information may be retained in a memory (for example, RAM 1122).

As for the condition for starting the ART game (the condition for turning on the ART flag), simply speaking, the ART is won in the first ART first hit lottery.

In step S501 of FIG. 61, as the first process of the ART game determination process, the current ART flag is compared with the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game, and it is determined whether or not the ART flag is turned ON. That is, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the ART flag has changed from OFF to ON from the previous game to the current game. It is assumed that the value of the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the ART flag has been turned ON (YES in step S501), the number of ART games at the start of ART is set (step S502), and the process ends. The number of ART games (so-called initial number of games) at the start of ART may be set in advance as a fixed number of games, the number of games may be drawn at the time of winning ART, or it is determined by another method. However, here, as an example, it is assumed that the initial number of games determined by the above-mentioned instruction function processing is set as the number of ART games at the start of ART.

By performing such processing in step S502, the ART game is started from the next game. At the start of the ART game, the start of the ART game and the effect of clearly indicating the number of ART games to the player are performed (for example, the display of the ART start screen).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the ART flag is turned ON, that is, if the ART flag is OFF or the ART flag is ON from the previous game (NO in step S501), the ART flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is ON (step S505), and if the ART flag is ON (YES in step S505), it is determined whether or not it is in the special zone (step S506). Here, when it is determined that the ART flag is ON and it is not in the special zone (YES in step S505 and NO in step S506), it means that one game in the ART game has been played. Therefore, a process of subtracting "1" from the value of the number of ART games is performed (step S507). If it is determined in step S506 that the player is in the special zone (YES in step S506), the number of ART games is not subtracted, so step S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S508. If it is determined in step S505 that the ART flag is not ON (NO in step S505), the ART game is not in progress, so the process ends as it is.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the number of games at the start determined at the start of the ART game, an additional function of adding the number of ART games based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the ART game. Suppose that you have. When the number of ART games is added, a predetermined internal flag (additional flag) is turned ON, and the number of ART games to be added (number of additional games) is determined. The conditions for determining the addition are not particularly limited, and may be the winning of a specific winning combination in the combination lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Further, the method of determining the number of additional games is not limited to a special method. The processing of the following steps S508 to S510 is a processing performed when the function of adding the number of ART games is provided.

First, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the addition flag is ON. If the addition flag is ON (YES in step S508), a process of adding the number of addition games to the current number of ART games is performed (step S509), and the addition flag is turned off (step S510). As a result, the number of remaining ART games is increased by the additional amount, and the duration of the ART games that is advantageous to the player is extended.

After the processing of step S510 (after the processing of step S506 if the addition function is not provided), it is determined whether or not the current number of ART games is "0" (step S511), and if it is "0". Will satisfy the end condition of the ART game, so that the ART flag is turned off (step S512) to end the process. At this time, not only the end of the ART game should be clearly shown to the player, but also information about a series of ART games (for example, the total number of medals paid out in the ART game, the number of continuous ART games, etc.) should be clearly shown to the player. May be.

If the current number of ART games is not "0" in the determination of step S511 (NO in step S511), the ART game end condition is not satisfied, and the process ends without changing the ART flag. As a result, the ART game will be continued in the subsequent games.

The ART game determination process described with reference to FIG. 61 is a processing example in which the game period controlled to the gaming state for the ART game (ART game period) is deducted by 1 count for each game. , When the ART game period is managed by another subtractive method (for example, a method in which the ART game period is determined by the number of appearances of ART navigation), it is desirable to perform an appropriate ART game determination process according to the subtractive method. ..

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an internal flag (for example, an ART start flag) indicating the start of the ART game may be prepared separately from the ART flag for the ART game determination process. The ART start flag is an internal flag that is turned on when the ART game start condition is satisfied by winning the ART first hit lottery. In such a case, in a series of processes by the ART game determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the ART start flag is ON, and if the ART start flag is ON, the initial game of ART is in step S502. After setting the number, a process may be performed such that the ART flag is turned ON and the ART start flag is turned OFF. If the ART start flag is OFF in step S501, the processes after step S505 are performed. It should be.

[10-2. Control of production operation]
The above is mainly an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various production operations are controlled by the sub board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the sub board 510 (mainly CPU 1118 or the like) based on various commands (information commands, output signals) output from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, the effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such an effect mode is stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

For example, the effect mode includes a game that is completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single-shot effect mode), a game that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous effect mode), and the like. Of these, the one-shot production mode includes a production that suggests the winning flag (suggestion production, notification production, details will be described later), a production that informs the payout of medals (a mode that informs the payout appearance, and even the number of payouts). There is.

The suggestion effect is different from the effect of directly notifying the player of the winning flag (notification effect), and is an effect of indirectly notifying the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. , Displaying colors, etc. In addition, the suggestion effect is also performed when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of loss). In this case, the content is such that it is difficult to notice that it is a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken as any winning combination). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

In the notification effect, for example, when the winning flag is a bonus role or when the player wins the first ART winning lottery, the result related to the game such as "bonus confirmed!" Or "ART winning!" Is clearly shown to the player. It can be informed. This effect is more effective when it is executed for a winning combination (because there is a possibility of winning a large number of medals) that is particularly pleasing to the player such as a bonus or ART. That is, when the player wins the first hit of ART or the like, it is possible to give a meaning of congratulating that fact.

It should be noted that the various production modes described above can be executed as an image display by the liquid crystal display device 450, a sound effect generated by the speaker 142 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like, and the like. Such an effect mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression, such as when a player has been playing a game for a long time. It should be noted that the effect mode is not limited to being executed by the liquid crystal display device 450, the speaker 142, the LED decoration, or the like. For example, instead of the liquid crystal display device 450, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. In addition, dolls that imitate characters, movable models, and side reels (for example, they are placed in different positions from each reel and can be started and stopped regardless of the player's operation as part of the production. (To be executed), or lighting such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light typified by a rotating lamp) may be provided to execute various effects. If such a method is adopted, it is possible to fully entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[10-3. Processing when an abnormal condition occurs]
The processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during a game, an error is notified according to the type of the detected error. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main board 409, the error lamp 604 lights up (or blinks), and the special display LED 612 can display an error indicating the type of the error. In the special display LED 612, the instruction function display and the payout number display are usually performed. In addition, although an error may not be detected, a sudden power failure is also included in the abnormal state.

When the above abnormal state occurs, it is necessary to cancel the error in order to return to the normal game state (in the case of power off, the error display should not remain after the power is restored). The method of canceling the error differs depending on the error that has occurred, but it is often necessary to turn off the power (OFF / ON).

[11. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
The game characteristics of the slot machine of this embodiment will be described below. In a game in a normal state of the slot machine of this embodiment, the player plays a game in order to fill a predetermined meter called a "chance meter". This chance meter may be installed as an accessory, or may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 450.

To fill up the chance meter, specifically, a predetermined score is accumulated in the chance meter by winning a predetermined small role. The display mode indicating that the predetermined score has been accumulated may be a numerical value, a color gradation, or a display mode corresponding to the number of lamps, and may be visually or visually confirmed by the player. It would be nice to have one.

Bells, watermelons, cherries, etc. are mainly mentioned as the predetermined small roles, and the degree of points (numerical value, color, number of lamps) accumulated in the chance meter differs depending on which small role is won. Here, depending on each stage in the normal gaming state, if the corresponding small winning combination is won, the accumulated points will be higher, and if the corresponding small winning combination is won, the corresponding small winning combination will be won. The accumulated score may be low.

Among the roles that affect the score accumulation of the chance meter in this embodiment, those with a low degree of accumulation in the meter are called weak roles, for example, weak chance eyes, weak watermelon, and weak cherry (display omitted). Be done. In addition, those with a high degree of accumulation in the meter are called strong roles, and examples thereof include strong chance eyes, strong watermelons, and strong cherries (display omitted).

In each stage in the normal state, the stage corresponding to the weak role is the corresponding weak stage, the stage corresponding to the strong role is the corresponding strong stage, the stage not corresponding to the weak role is the non-corresponding weak stage, the strong role A stage that does not correspond is called a non-corresponding strong stage. Regardless of the winning combination, for convenience, it may be simply referred to as a corresponding stage or a non-corresponding stage.

The score accumulated in the chance meter (chance meter lottery) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The points accumulated in the chance meter are, for example, 0 to 4 points, and if the corresponding small role (both weak and strong) is won in each corresponding stage, it will be 0 point. There is no possibility and at least one point will be awarded. Here, in the weak response stage, the probability of being awarded 1 point is the highest, and in the strong response stage, the probability of being awarded 2 points is the highest. On the other hand, in the non-corresponding stage, the probability that both the non-corresponding weak stage and the non-corresponding strong stage are distributed to 0 points is the highest, and the probability that 1 to 3 points are given is 0.

When the score accumulated in the chance meter is full, an ART lottery (chance meter MAX hourly distribution lottery) is performed. By the ART lottery, it is decided whether to enter the chance zone or the ART game will be stocked. The flow in which the chance meter is added during the normal game state and whether the player enters the chance zone or the ART game is stocked by the ART lottery will be described with reference to the flowchart showing the normal state process of FIG. 63.

In step S601 of FIG. 63, when a rare small role, that is, a small role corresponding to a strong role or a weak role is won, a chance meter addition lottery is performed. At this time, if the stage in the normal gaming state is the corresponding weak stage or the corresponding strong stage, the chance meter addition lottery A is performed (step S603), while the stage in the normal gaming state is the non-corresponding weak stage or the non-corresponding weak stage or the non-corresponding stage. In the case of the corresponding strong stage, the chance meter addition lottery B is performed (step S604).

As explained with reference to FIG. 62, the chance meter addition lottery A indicates weak correspondence and strong correspondence, and the chance meter addition lottery B indicates weak non-correspondence and strong non-correspondence. When the chance meter addition lottery A or the chance meter addition lottery B is performed, it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won (step S605 in FIG. 63). If the lottery is won (YES in step S605), the score corresponding to the winning is added to the chance meter (step S607).

When the score is added to the chance meter, it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the chance meter has been reached by adding the score. Then, when it is determined that the upper limit value of the chance meter has been reached (YES in step S609), the value (count) of the chance meter is reset to 0 (step S611), and the ART lottery is performed (step S613).

If the ART lottery is won in step S613 (YES in step S615), the ART game is stocked (step S617), and if the ART lottery is not won (NO in step S615), the chance zone is stocked (step S618). ). Whether or not the ART game is started is described in the ART game determination process (see FIG. 61). When the chance zone is stocked, the chance zone game starts.

The distribution when the chance meter is full will be described with reference to FIG. 64. When the ART lottery is performed, it depends on the character displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 450 whether it is easy to win the chance zone or it is easy to stock the ART game. In general, if the probability of winning the chance zone is higher than the stock of the ART game, and the expectation of the ART stock is focused on, the character 2 <character 3 <character 1 becomes higher in this order. By the time the chance zone starts, a game for shifting to the so-called precursory game is played, and a mode-up lottery may be performed even in the game during the precursory game.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the processing in the chance zone. The chance zone is a zone where there is a high possibility that an ART lottery will be held. Further, the expectation for the subsequent ART game (the number of sets of ART games, the number of games of one set, etc.) changes depending on the mode in which the ART lottery is performed. Therefore, how good the ART lottery can be done is a pleasure for the player during the game. There are three modes, for example, 0, 1, and 2, but there may be three or more modes and three or less modes. In the order of 0 <1 <2, the expectation of the additional lottery probability of the ART game becomes higher.

In the chance zone processing of FIG. 65, first, the ART first hit lottery is performed (step S701). In this embodiment, a specification in which an ART lottery is performed when a "pushing order bell" is won (bell symbols are aligned) while staying in the chance zone will be described as an example. If the ART first hit lottery is performed in step S701 and the result is a win, that is, if the ART lottery is won (YES in step S702), the ART flag is turned ON (step S704), and the chance zone flag is flagged. Is turned off (step S706), the bell count is set to zero (step S708), and the mode is set to zero (step S710). In other words, if it is found that the ART lottery has been won during the chance zone, the ART game will be entered immediately, and the stay in the chance zone will end.

If the ART lottery is not successful (NO in step S702), it is determined whether or not the winning combination obtained by the lottery is a bell (step S712). If the winning combination is a bell (YES in step S712), the mode is set to zero (step S714), and the bell count is set to +1 (step S716). Then, by increasing the bell count by 1, it is determined whether or not the bell count has reached the maximum (step S718).

When the bell count is maximum (YES in step S718), the chance zone flag is turned off (step S720), and the bell count is set to zero (step S722). That is, it is possible to continue the chance zone until a predetermined number of bell symbols are aligned, but the stay in the chance zone ends when the predetermined number of bell symbols are aligned.

In step S712, if the winning combination is not a bell, it is determined whether or not the mode is maximum (step S724). When the winning combination is not a bell, there are weak chance eyes, weak watermelons, and weak cherries (display omitted), and strong chance eyes, strong watermelons, and strong cherries (display omitted).

When it is determined that the mode is the maximum (NO in step S724), a mode UP lottery is performed (step S726). Here, the probability of mode-up differs depending on whether the stage in which the small winning combination is won in the chance zone is the corresponding stage or the non-compatible stage of each small combination, as in the case where the score is accumulated in the above-mentioned "chance meter". .. In other words, it is easy to upgrade the mode if it is a small role of the corresponding stage, and it is difficult to upgrade the mode if it is a small role of the non-compatible stage.

The mode-up lottery when the mode is mode 0 and mode 1 will be described with reference to FIG. When the mode is mode 0, mode 0, mode 1 or mode 2 which is the same as it is in the mode-up lottery is drawn. According to FIG. 66, it can be seen that not only in the case of weak correspondence, but also in the case of winning a small combination of weak non-correspondence and strong non-correspondence, the process shifts to either mode 1 or mode 2 (FIG. 66 (A)). See). In addition, in the case of strong correspondence, it may be possible to shift to mode 2 with a probability of 100%.

Looking at the mode-up lottery when the mode is mode 1 (see FIG. 66 (B)), in most cases of loss or replay, the player falls to mode 0. Furthermore, when a small role that is not compatible is won, the case of falling to mode 0 and the case of shifting to mode 2 are fifty-fifty. On the other hand, it can be seen that if a small role with a strong non-correspondence is won, there is a 100% probability of shifting to mode 2.

If the mode-up lottery is won (YES in step S728 in FIG. 65), the mode is +1 or +2 depending on the winning mode (step S730). In this embodiment, three types of modes are prepared as described above, but the types are not limited to this. The chance zone may be terminated when the mode is up, or may be conditional on winning a predetermined number of small wins.

A mode of the reel and the sub reel (sub left liquid crystal display device 710L, sub right liquid crystal display device 710R) in each mode in the mode-up lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 67 to 84. FIG. 47 shows an operation mode of a sub reel (sub left liquid crystal display device 710L, sub right liquid crystal display device 710R) in the slot machine of this embodiment.

For example, when mode 2 is won in the mode-up lottery, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R have reels (left reel 70L, middle reel 70M, right reel 70R) as shown in FIG. 47. (The sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L is next to the left reel 70L, and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R is the right reel 70R). When mode 1 is won, either one of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R descends to the side of the reel. In this case, the player can have more expectations when the two sub-liquid crystal displays are lowered than when one of the sub-liquid crystal displays is lowered.

On the other hand, in the case of mode 0 (in the mode-up lottery, the mode did not shift to modes 1 and 2), the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R were used as in the case of mode 2 and mode 1. Will not come down. Therefore, the player can recognize that he / she is playing the game in mode 0. However, as a feint for the player, for example, even though the mode is 2, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R do not descend by the time the rotation of the reel 70 is started. You may. However, at the latest, it must be lowered before the rotation of any one of the three reels (left reel 70L, middle reel 70M, right reel R) of the reel 70 is stopped. By confirming the display of the symbol on the sub liquid crystal before confirming the stop symbol of the reel 70 (detailed explanation will be described later), it is possible to play the game while having expectations for the stop symbol of the reel 70. This is to achieve the purpose.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the addition probability of the ART game in the chance zone for each mode. FIG. 67A shows the addition probability of the ART game in the chance zone in mode 0. The numbers "0" and "1" at the left end are the difference between whether the ART game is stocked (added) or not, and "0" indicates that the ART game is not stocked, and "1". "Indicates that stock is made. In this embodiment, the condition for the ART stock is that "the bell symbols are aligned", but the symbols are not limited to the bells, and may be watermelons, cherries, or the like.

Here, "bell matching" means that the bell symbols are aligned, and "one spill" means that the bell symbol is missed but one medal is paid out, and one piece. Sometimes called a role. "Spill" means that the patterns are not aligned and the medals are not paid out, and it is also called "blank eye" or "missing eye". Weak response, strong response, weak non-correspondence, and strong non-correspondence are as already explained. These matters are the same in the case of mode 1 and mode 2.

In mode 0, there is a possibility that the ART game will be stocked if the bell symbols are aligned, if the small winning combination with weak correspondence is won, or if the small winning combination with strong correspondence is won. If you win a small role with a strong response, there is a 100% chance that the ART game will be stocked.

Looking at mode 1 (see FIG. 67 (B)), when the bell symbols are aligned, when the small winning combination with weak response is won, not only when the small winning combination with strong response is won, but also when one spill is made. ART games may be stocked even in the case of spills. Originally, if the bell symbols are not aligned, ART stock will not be made, but even if the bell symbols are spilled on the reel 70, the ART game will be stocked. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 68 to 84, but for the additional lottery of the ART game, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L that descends next to the reel 70 even if the bell symbols are not aligned on the reel 70. This is because even when the bell symbols are aligned with the symbol displayed on the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R and the symbol displayed on the reel 70, the bell symbols are drawn as if they are aligned.

Looking at mode 2 (see FIG. 67 (C)), as in mode 1, not only is the ART game stocked in the case of one spill or spill, but also the bells are aligned and one spill is made. There is a 100% chance that the ART game will be stocked regardless of the case and winning any of the small winning combination of weak response, strong response, weak non-correspondence, and strong non-correspondence. In the case of mode 2, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R descend on both sides of the reel 70, so that the display of the appearance and the reel 70 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 710 are displayed. It can be said that it is easy to align the bell patterns with the number of reels.

The contents described with reference to FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 84 based on the aspects of the reel 70, the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L, and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. FIG. 68 shows a case where the left reel 70, the right reel 70, and the middle reel 70 are stopped (so-called scissors striking) in the mode 0 state. In mode 0, neither the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L nor the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R descends next to the reel 70, so that the player understands that he / she is currently playing in mode 0. Can be done. In that case, the player wishes to add the ART game by relying only on the result displayed on the reel 70 (the display of the sub liquid crystal display device 710 cannot raise expectations).

FIG. 68 (b) shows that the left reel 70L was stopped first, then the right reel 70M (FIG. 68 (c)), and finally the middle reel 70R was stopped (FIG. 68 (d)). The result that can be confirmed in this state is a "spill" (that is, a lost eye), no medal is paid out, and since the bell symbols are not aligned, the additional lottery for the ART game is not performed.

FIG. 69 shows a case where the left reel 70, the right reel 70, and the middle reel 70 are stopped (scissors striking) in the mode 1. In mode 1, either the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L or the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R descends next to the reel 70. The player can play the game after knowing that he / she is playing in the mode 1 because any of the sub-left liquid crystal display devices 710 has descended.

In the case of mode 1, first, one of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R is the reel 70 before the reel 70 is stopped, such as when the start lever 129 is pressed. It descends next to. In this embodiment, a pattern in which the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L descends next to the left reel 70L will be described (FIG. 69 (a)). On the display screen 711 (left display screen 711L) of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L that has descended, the appearance of the stopped reel is displayed (see (a) in FIG. 69). As an effect before displaying the appearance, the mode in which the reel is rotating may be displayed as in the reel 70. Here, the point is that the appearance of the sub-liquid crystal display device is displayed before the reel 70 is stopped. However, as a feint, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal display device 710 may be displayed after the reel 70 is stopped.

The player can expect that the display is promising (such as the display that the bell is stopped) by displaying the result of the sub liquid crystal display device prior to the display of the result of the reel 70. Before stopping the reel 70, for example, the reel 70 can be stopped with the expectation that the symbols will be aligned between the sub liquid crystal display device 710 and the reel 70. In this embodiment, since "bell-arbitrary-bell" is displayed on the display screen 711L, the player can display the bell symbol at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions of the left reel 70L. Since the tempai (a state in which the bell symbols are aligned when the bells stop on the upper or lower stage of the middle reel 70M), the game can be played while expecting the stop symbols of the left reel 70L.

When the "replay-bell-bar (machete)" is stopped on the left reel 70L, the player can tempi the bell design with the upper or lower bell of the display screen 711L and the middle bell of the left reel 70L (Fig. 69). (B)) The game can be played with the expectation that the bells will be aligned on the upper or lower stages of the middle reel 70M. Since the right reel 70R does not have a particularly expected symbol, after the stop operation (FIG. 69 (c)), the game is advanced while expecting the stop symbol of the middle reel 70M. Since the stop symbol of the middle reel 70M is "replay-cherry-bell", the bell symbol is composed of the upper bell of the display screen 711L, the middle bell of the left reel 70L, and the lower bell of the middle reel 70M. .. Then, despite the fact that the rolls displayed on the reel 70 are "spills", that is, missed rolls, the ART is due to the matching of the bell symbols composed of the rolls displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 710. An additional lottery for the game will be held. In this way, the player can enjoy the so-called "bell-matching game" as described above even if the reward from the reel roll is not obtained, so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In the case of mode 2, both the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R descend next to the reel 70 before the reel 70 is stopped, such as when the start lever 129 is pressed. (Fig. 70 (a)). As a result, the player can clearly understand that the current mode is mode 2. On the display screen 711 (display screen 711L and display screen 711R) of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L that has descended, both "bell-arbitrary-bell" are displayed as the display of the appearance. Then, the player will be a tenpai with a bell symbol (the bell symbol will be aligned if the bell stops on the upper or lower stage of the middle reel 70M) regardless of the position of the bell on the upper, middle, or lower stage of the left reel 70L. , You can play the game while expecting the stop symbol of the left reel 70L.

When "Replay-Bell-Bar (machete)" is stopped on the left reel 70L, the player can tempi the bell design with the upper or lower bell of the display screen 711L and the middle bell of the left reel 70L (Fig. 70). (B)) The game can be played with the expectation that the bells will be aligned on the upper or lower stages of the middle reel 70M. Unlike the case of mode 1, in mode 2, the symbol displayed on the right reel 70R can also be expected. For example, in a situation where the symbol of the middle reel 70M has not been displayed yet (FIG. 70 (c)), the upper bell of the display screen 711 (display screen 711R) of the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R and the bell of the right reel 70R are used. If the bell stops on the upper part of the middle reel 70M, it is only necessary to configure the bell pattern with the lower bell of the display screen 711L, the middle bell of the left reel 70L, and the lower bell of the middle reel 70M. Instead, the bell symbol can be configured by the upper bell of the display screen 711R, the upper bell of the right reel 70R, and the upper bell of the middle reel 70M. As shown in FIG. 70 (d), in the present embodiment, the bells are not aligned even if the reel 70 and the sub reel are included, but the player can proceed with the game while having the above expectations.

71 to 73 show an aspect when the middle reel 70M is selected as the reel for which the stop operation is first performed (including the case where the push order navigation is followed). In the case of mode 0, neither the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L nor the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R descends next to the reel 70, so that the player relies on the result displayed on the reel 70 to perform ART. I hope the game will be added.

In the case of mode 1 (see FIG. 72), it can be said that the effect is different from the case where the left reel 70L is stopped first. Specifically, on the display screen 711 (left display screen 711L) of the left liquid crystal display device 710L, "bell-arbitrary-bell" is displayed as a display of the appearance of the stopped reel. Here, by first stopping the middle reel 70, it is possible to determine at which position the bells are aligned or not aligned at all. In FIG. 72 (b), since the "bell-replay-cherry" is stopped on the middle reel 70M, the player can proceed with the game while hoping that the upper bell or the middle bell will stop on the left reel 70L. ..

Even in the case of mode 2 (see FIG. 73), by stopping the middle reel 70M first, the upper bell or the middle bell of the left reel 70L is expected to stop, and the upper bell or the middle bell of the right reel 70R is stopped. You can play the game hoping that the bell will stop. Specifically, when the middle reel 70M is first stopped, "bell-replay-cherry" is displayed on the middle reel 70M (see FIG. 73 (b)), and formally, the left. The bell on the display screen 711L and the bell on the right display screen 711R are tempered (when the upper bell or middle bell stops on the left reel 70L, the bell symbols are aligned, and the upper bell or middle bell stops on the right reel 70R. The state that the symbols of the bells are aligned). In this state, the player operates the left stop button 128L while hoping that the upper bell or the middle bell stops on the left reel 70L.

FIG. 73 (c) shows a state in which the middle bell is stopped on the left reel 70L. When the right reel 70R is stopped, the player can perform the stop operation while hoping that the upper bell or the middle bell will stop. Then, while fixing the expectation of the outcome at an early stage, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the bell symbols may be aligned multiple times in one game.

The mode of each mode in the case where the roll displayed on the reel 70 is a “missing roll” will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 shows the case of mode 0. The description of matters common to the above is omitted. When the middle reel 70M is stopped, "cherry-bell-replay" is displayed (see Fig. 74 (b)), and at this stage, the left reel 70L is expected to have any of the upper bell, middle bell, and lower bell. You can play the game while holding the reel.

Since the stop symbol of the left reel L70 is "replay-bell-bar (machete)" (see FIG. 74 (c)), the player proceeds with the game while expecting that the middle bell is aligned on the right reel 70R. After all, it shows that it was a missed eye (FIG. 74 (d)).

In the case of mode 1 (see FIG. 75), it can be seen that the left reel 70L does not already have the expected symbol pattern at the stage of stopping the middle reel 70M. In this way, in a gaming machine that is not guided by the push order navigation and is not given a penalty due to the stop order, it is possible to have excessive expectations by promptly displaying the result of the additional lottery of the ART game at the discretion of the player. It can be suppressed. As for the "missing stitch" of this embodiment, the same applies to the result in the case of mode 2 (see FIG. 76), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the number of rolls displayed on the reel 70 is "one spill" (the number of bells is missed, but one medal is paid out), the modes of each mode are shown in FIGS. 77 to 79. I will explain. FIG. 77 shows the case of mode 0. The description of matters common to the above is omitted. When the left reel 70L is stopped, "Replay-Bell-Bar" is displayed (see Fig. 77 (b)), and at this stage, it is expected that the middle reel 70M and the right reel 70R will have the middle bell. You can play games while playing. Since the stop symbol of the middle reel M70 is "bell-replay-cherry" (see FIG. 77 (c)), the player cannot expect the formation of the bell symbol on the right reel 70R. This is shown (FIG. 74 (d)).

In the case of mode 1 (see FIG. 78), when the left reel 70L is stopped, the game can be advanced with the expectation that the upper bell will stop on the middle reel 70M. As shown in FIG. 78 (c), when the upper bell is stopped on the middle reel 70M, the lower bell of the display screen 711 (left display screen 711L) of the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L, the middle bell of the left reel 70L, and the middle bell. The player can understand that the bell design is composed of the upper bell of the reel 70M, and the lottery for adding the ART game is performed. In other words, the number displayed on the reel 70 is "1 spill" (the bell pattern is missed, but one medal is paid out), so while one medal is paid out, the ART game An additional lottery is also held.

In the case of mode 2 (see FIG. 79), in addition to the situation of mode 1, the upper bell and the middle reel 70M displayed on the display screen 711 (right display screen 711R) of the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R are further tempered. Therefore, the game can be advanced while expecting that the upper bell of the right reel 70R is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (d), the bell symbol is configured by the lower bell of the display screen 711 (left display screen 711L) of the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L, the middle bell of the left reel 70L, and the upper bell of the middle reel 70M. At the same time, the upper bell of the middle reel 70M, the upper bell of the right reel 70R, and the upper bell displayed on the display screen 711 (right display screen 711R) of the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R can also be used to form an ART. An additional lottery for the game will be held. In this way, by making the player recognize that a plurality of bell symbols are aligned, it can be suggested that the probability of being added in the additional lottery of the ART game is high.

Here, FIG. 79 shows an example of the symbol matching game of the present invention by pushing forward, but when the game is advanced by pushing forward, the first symbol matching game is played at the stage where the left reel 70L and the middle reel 70M are stopped. It can be played, and by stopping the right reel 70R, the second symbol matching game can be played. Here, if the player strikes with scissors, the bell symbol is in a double-tempered state in the situation where the symbol of the middle reel 70M is not displayed, and by stopping the middle reel 70M. At the same time, you can get the result of two symbol matching games at once. In the slot machine, there is a problem that the winning combination must be drawn in, so there is a problem that the outcome is one pattern. It can be said that the game has a wide range of fun in that it is possible to select whether to obtain the results of multiple symbol games at once.

Further, in FIG. 79, the pattern alignment can be realized by the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the reel 70, but if the bell symbol is stopped at the lower stage instead of the upper stage of the middle reel 70M. Means that the bell symbols were not aligned in the first bell symbol matching game. However, even in such a case, there is still the possibility that the reel 70 and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R form a bell symbol, and the player can align the bell symbols with the reel 70 and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. You can continue the game while expecting that. Although not shown in this embodiment, assuming that the bell symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 70M, the player plays the game on the expectation that the bell design will be aligned on the middle stage or the lower stage of the right reel 70R. You can do it.

80 to 82 will be used to describe the embodiment of the gaming machine in this embodiment when the bell symbol is established on the reel 70. In mode 0, as shown in FIG. 80 (d), since the bell symbol is established in the lower stage of the reel 70, it is possible to obtain the profits of both the winning of the bell in the internal lottery and the additional lottery of the ART game. .. In the case of mode 1, as shown in FIG. 81 (d), it is possible to realize the display of a quadruple bell with the lower bell of the display screen 711 (left display screen 711L) of the sub left liquid crystal display device 710L. In the case of mode 2, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), the display of five consecutive bells is realized with the lower bell displayed on the display screen 711 (right display screen 711R) of the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. Can be done.

When enabling the display of quadruple bells and quintuple bells, the first time the bell symbols are aligned (the bell symbols are displayed in the bell alignment game), a further advantageous score can be obtained. It may be possible (for example, the quadruple bell has a higher ART expectation than the quadruple bell, and the quintuple bell has a higher ART expectation than the quadruple bell), so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

As another example, FIGS. 83 and 84 show a pattern in which the design of the appearance of the sub-liquid crystal display device changes after one reel 70 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 83 (c) and 84 (c), after the left reel 70L is stopped, the pattern of the appearance of the sub liquid crystal display device changes from "bell-arbitrary-bell" to "arbitrary-bell-arbitrary". Show how it is changing. As a surprise, it may be changed after all reels have stopped.

As described above, the specification to change the design of the appearance of the sub liquid crystal display device after the design is displayed on at least one reel is the so-called "push" when the reel 70 is stopped, especially in the game in the chance zone. Even though the reel to be stopped is instructed by "Sequential Navi", the player mistakenly performed the stop operation of the reel different from the reel instructed by Push Order Navi (that is, on the reel). It is effective when the reels 70 cannot be stopped and operated in the order suggested by the push order navigation, and as a result, the symbols cannot be aligned).

In other words, if the reel 70 is stopped in the order suggested by the push order navigation, the bell symbols should be aligned on the reel 70 and 9 medals should be paid out (the player can make a profit). However, because I did not follow the push order navigation, I could not align the bell patterns and the medals were not paid out (it is possible that one medal is established and one medal is paid out). However, by changing the display of the appearance of the sub-liquid crystal display device after the symbols of the reels 70 are stopped, it is possible to realize the matching of the bell symbols, and it is possible to perform an additional lottery for the ART game.

In other words, even if the reel 70 is stopped by a stop operation contrary to the push order navigation, it is possible to perform an additional lottery for the ART game. In this case, the probability of the additional lottery of the ART game may be different depending on whether the bell symbols are aligned according to the push order navigation and the bell symbols are aligned against the push order navigation, but they are the same. It may be a probability.

As described above, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, the reels 70 (left reel 70L, middle reel 70M,) are also displayed on the display screen 711 of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R. It can be treated as if the symbols are aligned in the same way as the rolls displayed on the right reel 70R) (unlike the case where the winning combination is established as a result of the internal lottery). Then, by the time the reel 70 is stopped, the player confirms the display of the appearance displayed on the display screen 711 of the sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L or the sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R, and the corresponding symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the stop operation of the reel 70 while expecting that the reels are aligned. If the bell symbols are aligned including the sub liquid crystal display device 710, it is not possible to obtain the profit of the medal as in the case where the bells are aligned on the reel 70 (because it is not the result of the internal lottery), but ART is added. It is possible to give a player an advantageous benefit in terms of a lottery or a mode lottery.

As described above, the slot machine of this embodiment not only displays the appearance of the rolls using the sub liquid crystal display device (so-called sub reel), but also constitutes a pattern matching game together with the rolls displayed on the reels. This is possible, and when the symbols are aligned, the player can obtain a profit according to the symbols. The profit according to the symbol includes not only the addition of the ART lottery, but also the rush opportunity of the ART, the mode-up lottery, and the like. In addition, since the sub liquid crystal display device descends to the side of the reel, it is possible to confirm not only the expectation due to the operation of the accessory but also the mode in which the game is played, and further, the display of the sub liquid crystal display device. Based on the display of the appearance on the screen, you can almost certainly feel that some kind of pattern can actually be aligned (with high expectations), so you can continue the game, so it is a hobby. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, based on the appearance-like display displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 710, the expectation of the appearance displayed when the middle reel 70M is stopped may be suggested. For example, if the bell is in the middle of the left reel 70L, the expectation is low, and if the bell is in the lower of the left reel 70L, the expectation is high.

By the way, as described above, the chance zone can be terminated by aligning a predetermined number of bell symbols. Here, a feature of the present embodiment is that the symbol of the bell can be aligned in addition to the symbol displayed on the reel 70 by the display of the appearance pattern displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 710. The bell symbol that is aligned separately from the bell symbol that appears on the reel 70 also corresponds to the state that "a predetermined number of bell symbols are aligned", and the corresponding profit (addition of ART, rush opportunity of ART, mode-up lottery, etc.) is applied. In addition to being able to obtain it, it can also be an opportunity to end the chance zone. Then, for example, the slot machine of this embodiment is a one-time symbol matching game under the condition that the chance zone is terminated when the bell symbols are aligned three times, and there is a possibility that the bell symbols are aligned multiple times, so that the number of games is small. It is possible to end the chance zone with a number. In other words, there is an effect that the progress of the game is not delayed.

Based on the above characteristics, for example, although it is possible to align a plurality of symbols in one game, it is possible to prevent the player from aligning a plurality of symbols at his / her will. This can be controlled when the reel 70 is stopped without following the instructions in the push order navigation.

In this embodiment, the present invention has been described by taking as an example a pattern in which "bells" are aligned, but it can also be realized in the case of "watermelon" or "cherry". With such specifications, for example, if the bell symbol slips when the left reel 70L is stopped and the watermelon is displayed, the expectation of the watermelon is high, and the advantages of the symbols that are aligned when the reel is stopped ( Or it is possible to suggest a disadvantage).

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be represented as the following technical idea.

[Technical Thought]
The gaming machine represented by the slot machine described in the present embodiment includes a plurality of symbol rows to which a large number of symbols are attached and rotated, and a stop operation means capable of stopping the rotated symbol rows. , A stop control means capable of executing control to stop the rotated symbol sequence based on the operation of the stop operation means, and a combination of symbols when the plurality of symbol sequences are stopped. A gaming machine comprising a display area to be displayed and showing a game result by a combination of symbols displayed in the display area. The gaming machine is further configured to be capable of variably displaying a symbol. A movable display means capable of displaying a symbol before the rotation of a plurality of symbol rows is stopped, a symbol display displayed on the movable display means, and a symbol displayed on the symbol row. It is characterized in that it is provided with a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player by a symbol combination composed of.

According to the gaming machine described in the above technical idea, when a plurality of symbol rows (reels 70) are stopped, a display area (symbol display area A) in which a plurality of symbols are displayed is provided for each reel. That is, when a plurality of symbol rows are stopped, one symbol is displayed in each symbol row, for example, one symbol in each of the upper, middle, and lower rows (three symbols in one symbol row). Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a movable display means (sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and sub-right) capable of movably displaying a pattern at an adjacent position of at least one symbol sequence (left reel 70L and right reel 70R in the embodiment) is formed. The liquid crystal display device 710R) is descending. Further, these movable display means can display a symbol (display of a symbol) similar to the symbol displayed on the reel 70, and further, some symbol before the rotation of the reel 70 is stopped. Is displayed.

By visually recognizing the display of the symbol of the movable display means before the operation of stopping the rotation of the reel 70, the player can perform the stop operation while having an expectation for the stop symbol of the reel 70. Then, the display of the pattern displayed on the movable display means (sub-left liquid crystal display device 710L and sub-right liquid crystal display device 710R) and the stop display on the reel 70 (left reel 70L, middle reel 70M, right reel 70R) were displayed. When the symbol combination is configured across the symbol reels, advantageous benefits (ART game additional lottery, ART game rush opportunity, chance zone lottery, etc.) are given to the player. The player not only has expectations for the privilege because the movable display means descends next to the reel 70, but also confirms the display of the pattern displayed on the movable display means before the reel 70 is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game while having expectations for (combination of) the stop symbols, and by extension, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the slot machine 1 (pachislot machine) as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied to the machine, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

A symbol display area (game area)
1 Slot machine 2 Housing unit 3 Game unit 4 Door unit 5 Medium unit 10 Housing body (housing)
70 reel 70L Left reel 70M Middle reel 70R Right reel 120 Operation unit (operation unit)
200 Top cover unit 201 Top cover 201a Window 300 Front movable effect unit 302 Rear visible area (specific area)
310 Front movable decorative body (second movable member, movable member)
700 Horizontal movable production unit 710L Sub left liquid crystal display device (first movable member, movable member)
710R Sub right liquid crystal display device (first movable member, movable member)
711 display screen

Claims (1)

Lottery means to draw lots for winning,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
When the operating means is operated, the result suggesting means that suggests the result of the lottery, and the result suggesting means.
A gaming machine provided with an advantageous gaming state control means for starting an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is shown and a predetermined condition is satisfied.
When the game determined to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state by the lottery by the lottery means ends and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game is always controlled to the advantageous gaming state.
It is possible to recognize that the advantageous gaming state is controlled at a timing before the result of the lottery by the lottery means is shown.
During the game in which it is determined that the operation instruction display for the operating means is controlled to the advantageous gaming state by the lottery by the lottery means while it is recognizable that the control is controlled to the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to display with
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying that the game is controlled to the advantageous gaming state.
The notification effect for notifying that the advantageous gaming state is controlled is
Although it is possible to recognize that the advantageous gaming state is controlled at a timing before the result of the lottery by the lottery means is shown, the notification effect is not executed at the timing, and the lottery by the lottery means is used. It is an effect that is always executed after the result of the lottery of the game determined to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state is shown and before the next game of the game starts.
In a game determined to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state by a lottery by the lottery means, the operation instruction display displayed in the middle of the game is displayed on a predetermined liquid crystal display device before the operation instruction display is displayed. It is possible to show the reach mode to the player by the decorative pattern, and the reach mode is continuously displayed even after the operation instruction display displayed in the middle of the game is displayed.
Before the operation instruction display displayed in the middle of the game determined to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state by the lottery by the lottery means is displayed, the operation instruction display in a mode different from the operation instruction display is displayed. Is capable of displaying in the middle of a game determined to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state by a lottery by the lottery means.

Images